Mercedes - CL-Class - Owners Manual - 2002 - 2002

J_OM_215.book Seite 1 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 CL-Class Operator’s Manual J_OM_215.book Seite 2 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 CL 500 CL 55 AMG CL 600 J_OM_215.book Seite 3 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz. Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service. Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time: • Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference. • Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz. • Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants. We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving. DaimlerChrysler AG J_OM_215.book Seite 1 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Introduction Product information .......................... 7 Operator’s manual ............................. 8 Where to find it ................................ 13 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 15 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls ............... 18 Door control panel .......................20 Overhead control panel ............... 21 Dashboard .....................................22 Center console ..............................24 Operation Vehicle keys ......................................28 Start lock-out .................................... 31 General notes on the central locking system ...............32 Contents Central locking system ................... 33 Radio frequency and infrared remote control .............. 33 KEYLESS-GO ................................ 37 Opening and closing windows and sliding/pop-up roof from outside ................................. 44 Panic button ................................. 46 Mechanical keys .......................... 46 Doors ................................................. 47 Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid .................... 49 Central locking switch .................... 49 Automatic central locking ...............51 Emergency unlocking in case of accident .......................51 Trunk ................................................. 52 Trunk lamp ....................................... 55 Trunk lid release switch ................ 56 Trunk lid release/close switch ...... 57 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built prior to September 2001) ........................ 60 1 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built September 2001 and later) ...................................... 61 Antitheft alarm system ...................62 Tow-away alarm ................................64 Easy-entry/exit feature ...................66 Front seat adjustment ..................... 67 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints .......... 71 Backrest .............................................72 Lumbar support ............................... 74 Multicontour backrest ..................... 74 Seat heater ........................................ 76 Seat ventilation system ...................79 Power head restraints, rear ............ 81 Seat belts and integrated restraint system .......82 Seat belts ........................................... 82 Seat belt nonusage warning system ............................ 83 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ....................88 Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed ......... 89 J_OM_215.book Seite 2 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Contents 2 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ................................90 Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ............................. 91 Airbags ..............................................92 Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag .................................. 100 Infant and child restraint systems ............. 102 Steering wheel adjustment .......... 105 Rear view mirrors .......................... 106 Rear view mirror, automatic antiglare ................... 106 Memory function ............................111 Key dependent memory settings ........................113 Instrument cluster ..........................114 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display ...............120 Trip and main odometer and sub menu ............................124 Audio systems ................................ 126 Radio ............................................ 126 CD player .................................... 127 Cassette player ........................... 128 Telephone ....................................... 129 Telephone book .......................... 129 Redialing ......................................131 Incoming call ...............................133 Navigation system ..........................134 Distronic (DTR) ...............................135 Trip computer .................................136 Malfunction/warning message memory ......................138 Individual settings ........................ 140 Setting the audio volume ............. 149 Flexible service system (FSS) ............................................150 Tire inflation pressure monitor ........................................153 Engine oil level indicator ..............157 Engine oil consumption ................158 Exterior lamp switch ......................159 Headlamp mode ..............................160 Night security illumination ..........162 Headlamp cleaning system .......... 163 Combination switch ...................... 164 Hazard warning flasher switch .......................................... 167 Automatic climate control ............ 168 Display and controls .................. 170 Dust filter .................................... 172 Automatic maximum cooling ......................................... 172 Basic setting ............................... 173 Special settings .......................... 174 Air recirculation ......................... 176 Activated charcoal filter ............ 177 Economy mode ........................... 178 Residual engine heat utilization ........................... 179 Switching the automatic climate control on and off .................................... 180 Front center console storage compartment ventilation .......... 180 Rear window defroster .................. 181 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets ................ 182 J_OM_215.book Seite 3 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Power windows ............................... 183 Sliding/pop-up roof ....................... 186 Interior lighting ............................. 189 Rear window sunshade ................. 191 Sun visors ....................................... 192 Vanity mirrors ................................ 192 Interior ............................................ 193 Storage compartments and armrests ..................................... 193 Glove box ..................................... 194 Coat hooks ...................................... 198 Cup holder ...................................... 199 Ashtrays ..........................................202 Lighter .............................................204 Parcel net in trunk ........................205 Cargo tie-down hooks ....................206 Parcel net in front passenger footwell ..........206 Telephone, general ........................207 Garage door opener .......................208 Infrared reflecting windshield .... 212 Contents Driving Control and operation of radio transmitters .....................214 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ..................................215 Maintenance ...................................215 Tele Aid ............................................216 Catalytic converter ........................ 226 Emission control ............................ 227 Starter switch ................................. 228 Starter switch – KEYLESS-GO ..... 230 Starting and turning off the engine .................................. 233 Automatic transmission ............... 235 Parking brake ................................ 244 Driving instructions ...................... 245 Drive sensibly – save fuel ........ 245 Drinking and driving ................ 245 Pedals .......................................... 245 Power assistance ........................ 246 Brakes .......................................... 246 3 Driving off ...................................247 Parking ........................................248 Tires .............................................249 Snow chains ................................ 251 Winter driving instructions ......252 Deep water ..................................254 Passenger compartment ...........254 Traveling abroad ........................255 Cruise control .................................256 Distronic (DTR) ..............................259 Brake assist system (BAS) ............275 Antilock brake system (ABS) ........................................... 276 Electronic stability program (ESP) ...........................................278 Active body control (ABC) ............282 Level control system ......................283 Parking assist (Parktronic) ................................286 What you should know at the gas station .......................291 Check regularly and before a long trip ......................294 J_OM_215.book Seite 4 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Contents 4 Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ....................296 On-board diagnostic system .......................296 Check engine malfunction indicator lamp .............................296 Brake warning lamp ..................298 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp ..................299 Fuel reserve warning .................299 ABS malfunction indicator lamp .............................300 Electronic stabilityprogram (ESP) — warning lamp ...............301 Distronic (DTR) — warning lamp ..............................301 Seat belt nonusage warning lamp ..............................302 Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center console ......302 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .....302 Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display .............. 303 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) ................. 304 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) ....................... 304 BATTERY /ALTERNATOR ......... 305 ENTRY POSITION ...................... 306 BRAKE ASSIST ........................... 306 BRAKE PAD WEAR .................... 307 BRAKE FLUID ............................ 307 PARKING BRAKE ....................... 308 TRUNK OPEN ............................. 308 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. (Electronic stability program) . 309 COOLANT (coolant level) ..........310 COOLANT (coolant temperature) ................ 311 LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................312 LAMP SENSOR ............................314 SEAT BELT SYSTEM ...................314 TELEPHONE – FUNCTION ........315 CRUISE CONTROL ......................315 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (ABC) ............................................ 316 TIRE PRESSURE ......................... 318 ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................320 SEAT BACKREST ........................321 KEY ...............................................322 DOOR ...........................................322 HOOD ...........................................323 TELE AID .....................................323 WASHER FLUID .........................326 DISTRONIC (DTR) ......................327 Practical hints First aid kit .....................................330 Fuses ................................................331 Shelf below rear window ..............333 Hood .................................................334 Checking engine oil level .............337 Automatic transmission fluid level ...................................338 Active body control (ABC) fluid level ........................338 Coolant level ...................................339 Adding coolant ...........................339 J_OM_215.book Seite 5 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Windshield and headlamp washer system ...........................340 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio .........340 Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment ............................. 341 Jack ...................................................342 Wheels .............................................343 Tire Replacement .......................343 Rotating wheels ..........................344 Spare wheel ....................................344 Changing wheels ...........................346 Tire inflation pressure ..................351 Battery .............................................352 Jump starting ..................................355 Towing the vehicle .........................357 Exterior lamps ................................360 Headlamp assembly ................... 361 Taillamp assemblies ..................364 Standby bulb function ...................367 Contents Changing batteries in the electronic key ................ 369 Synchronizing remote control .............................371 Changing batteries in the KEYLESS-GO-card ............. 372 Emergency engine shut-down ......374 Fuel filler flap, manual release ..........................374 Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof .................. 375 Replacing wiper blades .................376 Roof rack ......................................... 378 Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle ................................. 380 Power washer ............................. 381 Tar stains .................................... 382 Paintwork, painted body components ................................ 382 5 Engine cleaning ..........................382 Vehicle washing .........................382 Ornamental moldings ................383 Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses ......................383 Cleaning the Distronic system sensor .............................384 Cleaning the parktronic system sensors ...........................384 Wiper blades ...............................385 Light alloy wheels ......................386 Instrument cluster .....................387 Steering wheel and gear selector lever ......................387 Cup holder ...................................387 Seat belts .....................................388 Headliner and shelf below rear window .....................388 Leather upholstery .....................388 Hard plastic trim items .............388 Plastic and rubber parts ............388 J_OM_215.book Seite 6 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Contents 6 Technical data Index Spare parts service ........................390 Warranty coverage .........................390 Identification labels ....................... 391 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............393 Technical data ................................394 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities .......399 Engine oils ......................................401 Engine oil additives .......................401 Air conditioner refrigerant ...........401 Brake fluid ......................................401 Premium unleaded gasoline ........402 Fuel requirements .........................402 Gasoline additives .........................403 Coolants ...........................................403 Consumer information ..................405 Index ............................................... 407 J_OM_215.book Seite 7 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Product information Kindly observe the following in your own best interest: We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model. We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them. Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed. Introduction 7 J_OM_215.book Seite 8 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Introduction 8 Operator’s manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, including: • New Car Limited Warranty, • Emission System Warranty, • Emission Performance Warranty, • California, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Massachusetts, and Vermont only), • State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws). J_OM_215.book Seite 9 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ore more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair and have given us a direct opportunity to perform a repair ourselves, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us of the need for its repair and given us the opportunity to repair ourselves, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calender days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350. Maintenance The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals. Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you. Introduction 9 J_OM_215.book Seite 10 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Introduction 10 Roadside assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box. Change of address or ownership If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. J_OM_215.book Seite 11 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: • Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available, • unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts, • gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Introduction In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5 11 J_OM_215.book Seite 12 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Introduction 12 We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle. If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle. J_OM_215.book Seite 13 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Where to find it The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections: • Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat. • Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation. • Driving: Important information on driving. • Instrument cluster display: Displays and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions. • Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency. • Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle. • Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here. • Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly. Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment. Explanation of color used: Warning notices for the protection of yourself and others appear on red background. Introduction 13 J_OM_215.book Seite 14 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Introduction 14 Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us at the following addresses: In the USA: In Canada: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5 J_OM_215.book Seite 15 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. Introduction 15 J_OM_215.book Seite 16 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 J_OM_215.book Seite 17 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls ............... 18 Door control panel .......................20 Overhead control panel ............... 21 Dashboard .....................................22 Center console ..............................24 Contents - Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation Driving 17 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 18 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Instruments and controls Practical hints 18 Instruments and controls 3 Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 19 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 1 Door control panel, see page 20 3 Dashboard, see page 22 2 Overhead control panel, see page 21 4 Center console, see page 24 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 19 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 20 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Instruments and controls Practical hints Car care Technical data 20 Door control panel 1 Door handle, pull to open, see page 47 2 Memory function switches (for storing seat, steering wheel, rear view mirror and exterior mirror settings), see page 111 5 4 2 3 Seat heater switch, see page 76 Seat ventilation, see page 79 4 Front seat adjustment switches, see page 67 3 5 Exterior mirror adjustment switches, see page 107 Exterior mirrors, electrically folding switches, see page 109 1 6 Power window switches, see page 183 6 7 6 7 Switch for rear door window override, see pages 183 and 185 8 Trunk lid release switch, see page 56 Trunk lid opening/closing system switch, see page 57 8 P72.10-2072-27 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 21 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Overhead control panel 1 Interior lighting switches, see page 189 2 Sliding/pop-up roof switch, see page 186 3 Tele Aid (emergency call system) switch, see page 216 4 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid, telephone and voice recognition system 1 5 Rear view mirror, see page 106 6 Garage door opener, see page 208 2 3 4 5 6 P82.00-2030-27 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 21 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 22 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Instruments and controls Practical hints Technical data Car care 22 Dashboard 16 1 17 17 13 14 2 18 11 3 22 23 3 15 5 6 7 18 12 10 4 19 20 21 9 8 P68.10-2548-29 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 23 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 13 Instrument cluster, see page 114 1 Left front parktronic warning indicator, see page 288 2 Side air outlet, adjustable 14 Voice recognition system switch, see separate operating instructions 3 Air volume control for side air outlet 15 Starter switch, see page 228 4 Exterior lamp switch, see page 159 16 Right front parktronic warning indicator, see page 288 5 Headlamp washer button, see page 163 17 Fixed air outlets 6 Parking brake release, see page 244 18 Center air outlets, adjustable 7 Hood lock release, see page 334 19 Air volume control for left center air outlet 8 Parking brake pedal, see page 244 20 Air temperature control for center air outlets 9 Easy-entry/exit feature switch, see page 66 Steering wheel adjustment switch, see page 105 21 Air volume control for right center air outlet 10 Combination switch, see page 164 22 Glove box lock, see page 194 11 Cruise control switch, see page 256, or Distronic (DTR) switch, see page 259 23 Glove box lid release, see page 194 12 Multifunction steering wheel, see page 120 Driver airbag, see page 92, Horn (with electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2) Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 23 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 24 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instruments and controls Center console Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 24 1 ESP (electronic stability program) control switch, see page 280 2 Level control switch for vehicles with ABC, (Active Body Control), see page 283 3 ABC (active body control) switch, see page 282 4 Switch for rear seat head restraints switch, automatic, see page 81 5 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 167 6 Central locking switch, see page 49 7 Antitheft alarm system, see page 62 Switch for tow-away alarm, see page 64 8 Parking assist (parktronic system) deactivation switch (optional), see page 286 9 Switch for rear window sunshade, see page 191 10 COMAND system, see separate operating instructions 11 Automatic climate control, see page 168 Rear window defroster switch, see page 181 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 25 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 12 Ashtray, see page 202 Lighter, see page 204 15 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see page 302 16 Distronic (DTR) – switch for distance warning function, see page 271 13 Start-/Stop button Starter switch for KEYLESS-GO only, see page 230 17 Distronic (DTR) – thumbwheel for setting distance, see page 271 14 Automatic transmission, see page 235 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 25 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 26 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Contents - Operation Operation Vehicle keys ......................................28 Start lock-out .................................... 31 General notes on the central locking system ...............32 Central locking system ...................33 Radio frequency and infrared remote control ...............33 KEYLESS-GO .................................37 Opening and closing windows and sliding/pop-up roof from outside ..................................44 Panic button ..................................46 Mechanical keys ...........................46 Doors ..................................................47 Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid .....................49 Central locking switch ....................49 Automatic central locking .............. 51 Emergency unlocking in case of accident ...................... 51 Trunk .................................................52 Trunk lamp .......................................55 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 26 Trunk lid release switch ................ 56 Trunk lid release/close switch ...... 57 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built prior to September 2001) ........................ 60 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built September 2001 and later) ......................................61 Antitheft alarm system ................... 62 Tow-away alarm ............................... 64 Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 66 Front seat adjustment ..................... 67 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints ...........71 Backrest ............................................ 72 Lumbar support ................................74 Multicontour backrest .....................74 Seat heater .........................................76 Seat ventilation system .................. 79 Power head restraints, rear ............81 Seat belts and integrated restraint system ....... 82 Seat belts .......................................... 82 Seat belt nonusage warning system ............................ 83 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ....................88 Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed ......... 89 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ................................90 Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ............................. 91 Airbags ..............................................92 Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag .................................. 100 Infant and child restraint systems ............. 102 Steering wheel adjustment .......... 105 Rear view mirrors .......................... 106 Rear view mirror, automatic antiglare .................. 106 Memory function ............................111 Key dependent memory settings ........................113 Instrument cluster ..........................114 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 27 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display ...............120 Trip and main odometer and sub menu ............................124 Audio systems ................................126 Radio ............................................126 CD player .....................................127 Cassette player ...........................128 Telephone ........................................129 Telephone book ..........................129 Redialing ..................................... 131 Incoming call .............................. 133 Navigation system .......................... 134 Distronic (DTR) ............................... 135 Trip computer ................................. 136 Malfunction/warning message memory ...................... 138 Individual settings ......................... 140 Setting the audio volume .............. 149 Flexible service system (FSS) ...... 150 Tire inflation pressure monitor ....................................... 153 Engine oil level indicator .............. 157 Engine oil consumption ................ 158 Exterior lamp switch ......................159 Headlamp mode ..............................160 Night security illumination ..........162 Headlamp cleaning system ...........163 Combination switch .......................164 Hazard warning flasher switch ..........................................167 Automatic climate control .............168 Display and controls ................. 170 Dust filter .................................... 172 Automatic maximum cooling ......................................... 172 Basic setting ............................... 173 Special settings ...........................174 Air recirculation ......................... 176 Activated charcoal filter ........... 177 Economy mode ........................... 178 Residual engine heat utilization ........................... 179 Switching the automatic climate control on and off .....................................180 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ...........180 Contents - Operation Instruments and controls Operation Rear window defroster .................. 181 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets ................ 182 Power windows ............................... 183 Sliding/pop-up roof ....................... 186 Interior lighting ............................. 189 Rear window sunshade ................. 191 Sun visors ....................................... 192 Vanity mirrors ................................ 192 Interior ............................................ 193 Storage compartments and armrests ..................................... 193 Glove box ..................................... 194 Coat hooks ...................................... 198 Cup holder ...................................... 199 Ashtrays ..........................................202 Lighter .............................................204 Parcel net in trunk ........................205 Cargo tie-down hooks ....................206 Parcel net in front passenger footwell ..........206 Telephone, general ........................207 Garage door opener .......................208 Infrared reflecting windshield .... 212 27 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 28 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 28 Vehicle keys and KEYLESS-GO-cards (optional) Warning! Included with your vehicle are: When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch and take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. • 2 electronic keys with integrated radio frequency and infrared remote controls plus removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two electronic keys are a different color to help distinguish each individual key. • Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: 2 KEYLESS-GO-cards without removable mechanical key. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: See page 43 on how to use the electronic key together with the KEYLESS-GO-card. Important! In the case of the loss of a KEYLESS-GO-card, electronic keys or mechanical keys, please, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) as soon as possible to have the keys or KEYLESS-GO-card deactivated. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 29 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Electronic key When using the mechanical key (2) for lock operations, it can be removed by sliding it out of the remote control. To do so, move locking tab (3) to the right and slide the mechanical key (2) in direction of arrow (4). The remote control transmitter is located in the electronic key. 1 The infrared receivers are located in the door handles. Note: Remove the mechanical key from the electronic key when using valet parking service. To prevent access to trunk or storage compartments lock them separately and retain the mechanical key. 3 2 4 P80.35-2031-26 See page 52 for separate locking of trunk and page 194 for locking of glove box. The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency and infrared remote control, plus removable mechanical key. The remote control (1) operates all locks on the vehicle. The mechanical key (2) works only in the driver’s door, trunk, and storage compartment locks. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 29 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 30 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 30 KEYLESS-GO-card The validity of the KEYLESS-GO-card is checked every time when grasping a door handle or pushing the trunk lid release. Once the KEYLESS-GO-card is recognized outside the vehicle, the doors, trunk lid and fuel filler flap are unlocked, depending on the selected mode (global or selective unlocking mode, see page 42). Starter switch KEYLESS-GO, see page 230. 1 Starting and turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO, see page 234 and page 234. Note: P80.30-2029-26 The KEYLESS-GO-card (1) does not have a removable mechanical key. The functions of the KEYLESS-GO-card (1) are identical to those of the electronic key. Carrying the card with you permits the use of the vehicle. In the case of a malfunction in the KEYLESS-GO-system, we recommend that you carry the electronic key plus mechanical key with you and keep them in a safe place so that they are always handy. Never leave the electronic key or a KEYLESS-GO-card in the vehicle. Obtaining replacement keys Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking system requiring a special key manufacturing process. For security reasons, replacement keys or the KEYLESSGO-card can only be obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 31 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Start lock-out Note: In case the engine cannot be started (vehicle’s battery is in order), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FORMERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Important! Operating with electronic key: Removing the electronic key from the starter switch activates the start lock-out. The engine cannot be started. Inserting the electronic key in the starter switch deactivates the start lock-out. Operating with KEYLESS-GO: Turning off the engine with the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever activates the start lock-out. For turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO, see page 234. Starting the engine with the start-/stop button deactivates the start lock-out, if a valid KEYLESS-GOcard is recognized inside the vehicle. For starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO, see page 234. The engine cannot be started with a KEYLESS-GO-card outside the vehicle. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 31 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 32 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 32 General notes on the central locking system Note: If the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote control or a KEYLESS-GO-card. If neither the remote control nor KEYLESS-GO system functions, use the mechanical key to unlock or lock the vehicle. To start engine, insert the electronic key in the starter switch. There could be a slight delay until the electronic key can be turned in the starter switch. If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked: • Aim transmitter eye at a receiver on either door handle. Check the batteries of the electronic key, see page 369, or synchronize the remote control, see page 371. • Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO only: A KEYLESS-GO-card must be recognized by the system as being outside the vehicle to enable the vehicle to be locked or unlocked (maximum distance between card and doors or trunk is approximately 3 ft. (1 m). Check the location of the KEYLESS-GOcard, see page 37. Check the batteries of the KEYLESS-GO-card, see page 372. The trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO card is detected in the trunk, see page 38. Important! When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. To cancel the alarm: • insert the electronic key in the starter switch, • press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key or • vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when carrying the KEYLESS-GO-card, grasp the door handle or press the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 33 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Central locking system 4 Radio frequency and infrared remote control 3 The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency and infrared remote control. 2 1 Due to the extended operational range of the remote control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button. If one of the transmit buttons is pressed, the battery check lamp lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are in order. See page 369 for checking batteries. 5 P80.35-2032-26 The vehicle doors, trunk and fuel filler flap can be centrally locked and unlocked via remote control. 1 Transmit button ‹ Locking Opening and closing the windows and sliding/pop-up roof and switching on the driver’s seat ventilation can only be done with the infrared portion of the remote control. Aim transmitter eye at a receiver (6 or 7), press and hold transmit button Œ or ‹, see page 44. Œ Unlocking Š Opening trunk (if not separately locked) 2 Lamp for battery check (see page 369 for changing batteries if it does not light up briefly) With vehicle centrally locked, the trunk can also be opened by using the remote control. 3 PANIC button If the electronic key is inserted in starter switch, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked, and the trunk lid cannot be opened with the remote control. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 4 Transmitter eye 5 Locking tab for mechanical key 33 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 34 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system 6 Infrared receiver in driver’s door handle Practical hints Car care Technical data 34 7 Infrared receiver in passenger door handle Index J_OM_215.book Seite 35 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Locking and unlocking with remote control If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote control, neither door nor trunk is opened, the electronic key is not inserted in the starter switch, or the central locking switch is not activated, the vehicle will automatically lock. Unlocking: Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked. The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of unlocking modes (see below): Locking: Press transmit button ‹ once. All turn signal lamps blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked. If they do not blink three times, a door or trunk is not properly closed. Selective unlocking mode – Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door and fuel filler flap. Press transmit button Œ twice to unlock both doors, fuel filler flap, and trunk. Note: Global unlocking mode – Press transmit button Œ once to unlock both doors, fuel filler flap, and trunk. If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change the batteries in the electronic key (if ok, battery check lamp in electronic key will light briefly when pressing transmit button) or to synchronize the remote control, see pages 369 and 371. Notes: If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will remain locked, see page 52. The presently active unlocking mode (selective or global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle with the remote control (see below for changing mode). Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 35 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 36 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 36 Choosing global or selective mode on remote control Important! Press and hold transmit buttons ‹ and Œ simultaneously for approximately 6 seconds to reprogram the remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times indicating the completed mode change. Do not place remote control in trunk since trunk is locked when the lid is closed if the vehicle is centrally locked. Notes: Opening the trunk The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should always make sure there is sufficient clearance. A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. Press transmit button Š until trunk lid is open. If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will remain locked, see page 52. Vehicles with optional trunk lid opening/closing system (see page 57): The switch operated opening/closing procedure can be immediately halted by pressing button Š on the electronic key. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 37 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 KEYLESS-GO • If the KEYLESS-GO-card is removed from the vehicle while the engine is running, or by placing the card in front of the center armrest (see page 195), the message “CHIP-CARD – NOT RECOGNIZED!” will appear repeatedly in the multifunction display, see page 324. Find the card or change its present location (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket). Important! For the KEYLESS-GO-system to function properly, the operator should observe the following: • The driver should carry the KEYLESS-GO-card with him/her. • To avoid radio transmission interference, never store the KEYLESS-GO-card together with other electronic items (e.g. cellular telephones, other KEYLESS-GOcards) or metallic objects (e.g. coins, metal foil). • If the message “CHIP-CARD – NOT RECOGNIZED” is ignored for an extended period of time (approx.15 minutes), the engine could stop by itself during a vehicle stop (e.g. traffic light). The vehicle can then no longer be centrally locked or the engine restarted. You must first find the card or change its present location (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket). Start the engine again. See page 230. • To lock or unlock the vehicle, the card must be recognized by the system as being located outside the vehicle. The card must be in close proximity to a door or the trunk lid (approx. 3 ft. [1 m]). To activate the start/stop button function, the KEYLESS-GOcard must be recognized by the system as being located inside the vehicle. • Do not forget, the engine can be started by anyone with a KEYLESS-GO-card that is left inside the vehicle. Leaving the chip-card behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, the message “CHIP-CARD – STILL IN VEHICLE” appears in the multifunction display, see page 324. • If the KEYLESS-GO-card is positioned farther away from the vehicle (e.g. inside clothing or a briefcase) and can no longer be recognized by the system, the vehicle cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO-system. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 37 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 38 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system • Opening the driver’s door with the engine shut off and no electronic key in the starter switch, the message “CHIP-CARD – DO NOT FORGET” appears as a reminder, see page 324. Important In the case of a malfunction in the KEYLESS-GO-system, we recommend that you carry the electronic key plus mechanical key with you and keep them in a safe place so that they are always handy. Never leave the electronic key in the vehicle. Practical hints Car care Technical data 38 Notes: The KEYLESS-GO-function also permits closing of windows and sliding/pop-up roof (convenience feature), see page 45. With the KEYLESS-GO-card in close proximity (approx. 3 ft. [1 m]) of the vehicle, aiming a jet of water at a door handle (e.g. when washing the vehicle) or cleaning snow from a door, could lock or unlock the vehicle inadvertently. To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO-card is recognized in the area of the rear shelf or inside the trunk. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 39 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Locking and unlocking with KEYLESS-GO-card Notes: The door which was unlocked, can be opened immediately after the audible click. The other door can be opened after its lock button rises up. Unlocking: Grasp either door handle. All turn signal lamps blink once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked. If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will remain locked, see page 52. The KEYLESS-GO-card can be programmed for two kinds of unlocking modes (see below): The presently active unlocking mode (selective or global) can be determined by pressing the button on the KEYLESS-GO-card (see page 42 for changing mode). Selective unlocking mode – Grasp driver’s door handle to unlock driver’s door and fuel filler flap. If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the KEYLESS-GO-card, neither door nor trunk is opened, the electronic key is not inserted in the starter switch, or the central locking switch is not activated, the vehicle will automatically lock. Grasping the passenger door, centrally unlocks the vehicle. Global unlocking mode – Grasp either door handle to unlock both doors, fuel filler flap, and trunk. For choosing global or selective mode on KEYLESS-GOcard, see page 42. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 39 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 40 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 40 Note: Locking the vehicle with the door lock button (1) is only possible if a KEYLESS-GO-card is outside the vehicle. Locking: Press lock button (1) at either door. All turn signal lamps blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked. If they do not blink three times, a door or trunk is not properly closed, or the KEYLESS-GO-card is still in the vehicle. Check the multifunction display, see page 324. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 41 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Notes: If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will remain locked, see page 52. The vehicle cannot be centrally unlocked via the trunk lid lock (2). To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO-card is recognized in the area of the rear shelf or inside the trunk. Unlocking: Press trunk lid lock (2) to open trunk only. Locking: Press the trunk lid lock button (3). All turn signal lamps blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked. If they do not blink three times, a door or trunk is not properly closed or a KEYLESS-GO-card is still in the vehicle. Check the multifunction display, see page 324. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 41 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 42 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 42 Choosing global or selective mode on KEYLESS-GO-card Checking last KEYLESS-GO-card locking mode 2 Briefly press button (1). The indicator lamp (2) or (3) lights up in red (vehicle locked) or in green (vehicle unlocked). 3 1 P80.30-2027-26 To choose between the selective or global opening mode press and hold button (1) until the indicator lamp at the requested symbol (2) or (3) comes on. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 43 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Simultaneous use of electronic key and KEYLESS-GO-card If the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch while the gear selector lever is in position “P”, the electronic key takes over. The vehicle operates according to the electronic key position in the starter switch (see page 228), eventually even stopping the engine. When using the electronic key and the KEYLESS-GOcard at the same time, the electronic key overrules the KEYLESS-GO-card. If the engine is started with the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever, and afterwards the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch, the engine continues to run with the gear selector lever in positions “R”, “N”, “D” plus ranges “4”, “3”, “2”, “1” until it is stopped by using the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation Warning! When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card with you, and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. 43 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 44 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Opening and closing windows and sliding/pop-up roof from outside (summer opening/convenience feature) Aim transmitter eye of remote control at a door receiver. Summer opening: (Operation with electronic key) The sliding/pop-up roof and all side windows can be opened and the driver’s seat ventilation automatically switches on. See page 79 for seat ventilation. Continue to press transmit button Œ after unlocking the vehicle. The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to open after approximately 1 second. The driver’s seat ventilation automatically switches on. See page 79 for seat ventilation. To interrupt opening procedure, release transmit button. Practical hints Car care Technical data 44 Convenience feature: (Operation with electronic key) The sliding/pop-up roof and the side windows can be closed. Continue to press transmit button ‹ after locking the vehicle. The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after approximately 1 second. To interrupt closing procedure, release transmit button. Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle. Warning! Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button. To reverse direction of movement press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 45 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Note: Warning! If the windows and sliding/pop-up roof cannot be operated automatically by pressing the transmit button of the remote control then it may be necessary to change the batteries in the electronic key (if ok, battery check lamp in electronic key will light briefly when transmitting), or to synchronize the remote control, see page 369 and 371. Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the lock button. To reverse direction of movement pull and hold outside door handle. Convenience feature (Operation with KEYLESS-GO) Continue to press lock button on door handle after locking the vehicle. The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after approximately 1 second. To interrupt closing procedure, release lock button. To reverse direction (within 2 seconds after closing), pull and hold door handle. Opening of windows starts and continues for as long as the door handle is held but the door not opened. Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 45 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 46 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 46 Panic button Note: For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 1 (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void to the user’s authority to operate the equipment. P80.35-2035-26 To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps will operate for approximately 21/2 minutes. To deactivate press button (1) again, or insert electronic key in starter switch. Mechanical keys The mechanical keys work only in driver’s door, trunk, and storage compartment locks. Notes: The mechanical key does not operate the central locking system or antitheft alarm system. The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the mechanical key. If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 374. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 47 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Doors 2 3 1 P80.30-2131-26 4 Individual door from inside: Push lock button down to lock. 1 Opening – pull handle 2 Unlocking driver’s door 5 Individual door from inside: Pull handle to unlock. 3 Locking driver’s door Important! When you lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the door lock button should move down. The mechanical key does not operate the central locking system or antitheft alarm system. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation The passenger door must be locked with the door lock button – the driver’s door can only be locked when it is closed. 47 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 48 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the alarm. When opening a door while the central locking system is in the: • selective unlocking mode, only that individual door is unlocked. The remaining door, the trunk and fuel filler flap remain locked. • global unlocking mode, both doors, the trunk and fuel filler flap are unlocked. Notes: When opening a door, the door window and rear side window lower slightly. After closing the door, the windows close again. In case of a malfunction in the central locking system the doors can be locked and unlocked individually. To lock, push down lock button or turn mechanical key in driver’s door lock to position 3. In addition lock the trunk. Practical hints Car care Technical data 48 To unlock, pull inside door handles or turn mechanical key in driver’s door lock to position 2. When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. To cancel the alarm: • insert the electronic key in the starter switch, • press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key or • vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when carrying the KEYLESS-GO-card, grasp the door handle or press the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 49 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Central locking switch Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid The doors and the trunk lid close automatically if: • the doors are positioned against the lock, • the trunk lid is lowered against the lock. It is not necessary to slam the door or trunk lid closed, a pneumatic power-assisted mechanism draws doors and trunk lid closed quietly and automatically once the lid or door has been latched. When the pneumatic powerassisted mechanism has stopped, doors and/or trunk can be reopened. Warning! To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door or trunk opening when closing a door or the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. 2 Unlocking The pneumatic power closing assist mechanism cannot be interrupted once it has been engaged. The central locking switch is located in the center console. To prevent personal injury, never actuate the closing assist mechanism by tampering with the door or trunk lid latch. The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central locking switch, if the passenger door is closed. Central locking system Instruments and controls 1 Locking Operation 49 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 50 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Important! When the driver’s door is open and the central locking switch is activated, the complete vehicle is locked after closing the driver’s door. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch, while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch, while in the global remote control mode, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside. Notes: If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote control or the lock button at any door handle (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) the doors and trunk cannot be unlocked with the central locking switch. The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch. If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the alarm. Practical hints Car care Technical data 50 To cancel the alarm: • insert the electronic key in the starter switch, • press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key or • vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when carrying the KEYLESS-GO-card, grasp the door handle or press the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever. Warning! When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 51 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Automatic central locking Important! With the automatic central locking system activated, the doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a dynamometer test stand, please, note the following: With the automatic central locking activated and the electronic key in starter switch position 2 (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: operation position, see page 230), the vehicle doors will lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel spin at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The automatic central locking function can be switched on or off in the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”, see page 147. Notes: If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch after activating the automatic central locking, and neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked even at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Emergency unlocking in case of accident The doors unlock automatically a short time after an accident in which an airbag or emergency tensioning retractor deploys (this is intended to aid rescue and exit). If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the automatic central locking activated, the door will again be automatically locked at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. When a door is opened from the inside, the complete vehicle is unlocked, if the vehicle is previously unlocked in the global remote control mode. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 51 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 52 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Trunk Practical hints Car care Technical data 52 The lock is located in the license plate recess. When the trunk is separately locked, it remains locked when centrally unlocking the vehicle. To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave only the electronic key less its mechanical key with the vehicle. Notes: In case of a malfunction in the central locking system the trunk can be unlocked individually. To unlock and open the trunk lid, turn mechanical key to position 1, hold and push to open. 0 Neutral position – push to open (arrow) 1 Unlocking 2 Separate locking of trunk – remove mechanical key in this position. The mechanical key does not operate the central locking system or antitheft alarm system. When unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 53 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! To cancel the alarm: • insert the electronic key in the starter switch, Do not place mechanical key inside trunk, since trunk is locked again when closing the lid if the vehicle has been previously centrally locked. • press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key or • vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when carrying the KEYLESS-GO-card, grasp the door handle or press the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever. If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 374. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 53 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 54 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Technical data Car care 54 2 P88.50-2127-26 P54.25-2392-26 Vehicles without trunk lid opening/closing system: Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing system: Lower trunk lid using handle (1) and close it with hands placed flat on trunk lid. Please remember to keep your fingers out of the space between the lid and the vehicle. Press trunk lid button (2) briefly. The trunk lid closes automatically. The trunk lid can also be closed with the trunk lid opening/closing switch located on the driver’s door, see page 57. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 55 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 In case of a malfunction the trunk lid can be opened and closed manually. Warning! To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. To open, unlock trunk lid with the mechanical key and open lid by hand, see page 52. To close, lower trunk lid with hands placed flat on trunk lid. Please remember to keep your fingers out of the space between the lid and the vehicle. Always be sure persons who might get injured are away from the trunk area when you operate the trunk lid closing button located on the vehicle door. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO-card is recognized in the area of the rear shelf or inside the trunk. To interrupt the hydraulic power closing assist mechanism press trunk lid close button (2) inside the trunk lid, push in trunk lid lock, or press button Š on the electronic key. Notes: Trunk lamp The automatic closing process is interrupted if the trunk lid is pushed against an object. The trunk lid will reverse slightly and stop. In its final closing stage the hydraulic power closing assist mechanism releases the trunk lid which then drops into the lock by its own weight. Now the trunk lid will stop but not reverse slightly. The trunk lamp will switch off after approximately 10 minutes if the trunk lid is left open. Investigate and correct the cause of interruption. Now press trunk lid close button (2) again to close the trunk lid. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 55 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 56 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Trunk lid release switch (Vehicles without trunk lid opening/closing system) Practical hints Car care Technical data 56 The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should always make sure there is sufficient clearance. A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. To open the trunk, the vehicle must be at standstill. Pull up on switch until trunk lid is open. The indicator lamp in the switch remains on with trunk lid open. Notes: The trunk can also be opened by using the remote control. Press Š button. The switch is located on the driver’s door. The trunk lid cannot be opened by the switch or the remote control when previously locked separately with the mechanical key. To open, see page 52. The trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch when the vehicle was previously locked with the remote control. To unlock vehicle with the remote control, see page 33. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 57 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Trunk lid opening/closing system (optional) To open trunk lid: Pull up on switch until trunk lid begins to open. The switch can now be released, the trunk lid opens automatically. To interrupt the opening process, either pull up on switch, or push in trunk lid lock, or press button Š on the remote control. The indicator lamp in the switch remains on with trunk lid open. To close trunk lid: Press upper half of switch until trunk lid is closed and the indicator lamp in the switch goes out. The switch is located on the driver’s door. Warning! When closing the trunk lid, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. Be especially careful when small children are around. Maintain sight of trunk area while operating the door mounted switch. The trunk lid will open and close automatically. You should always make sure that there is sufficient clearance. A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. To interrupt the hydraulic power closing assist mechanism release trunk lid release/close switch and pull up to open. To open and close the trunk, the vehicle must be parked and unlocked. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 57 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 58 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Notes: The automatic closing process is interrupted, if the trunk lid is pushed against an object. The trunk lid will reverse slightly and stop. In its final closing stage the hydraulic power closing assist mechanism releases the trunk lid which then drops into the lock by its own weight. Now the trunk lid will stop but not reverse slightly. Investigate and correct the cause of interruption. Now press trunk lid opening/closing switch again to close the trunk lid. In case of a malfunction the trunk lid can be opened and closed manually. To open, unlock trunk lid with the mechanical key and open lid by hand, see page 52. To close, lower trunk lid with hands placed flat on trunk lid. Please remember to keep your fingers out of the space between the lid and the vehicle. Practical hints Car care Technical data 58 The trunk can also be opened by using the remote control. Press Š button. The trunk lid cannot be opened by the switch or the remote control when previously locked separately with the mechanical key. To open, see page 52. The trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid opening/closing switch when the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch. To unlock vehicle with the central locking switch, see page 49. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO-card is recognized in the area of rear shelf or inside the trunk. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 59 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Opening height restriction of trunk lid Note: The trunk lid opening height can be restricted when transporting goods on a roof rack (e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage container). When activated, the trunk lid opens to below the roof line of the vehicle. To fully open the trunk lid while opening height restriction activated, deactivate it. To activate: Press upper half of trunk lid opening/closing switch for a minimum of 5 seconds. To deactivate: Press upper half of trunk lid opening/closing switch for a minimum of 5 seconds. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 59 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 60 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built prior to September 2001) Practical hints Car care Technical data 60 Note: The emergency release button (1) only unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is not in motion. Important! The emergency trunk lid release button (1) does not open the trunk lid, if the trunk has been locked using the mechanical key or if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. Illumination of the emergency release button (1): The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the trunk. The emergency release button (1) is located in the trunk lid. Briefly press emergency release button (1). All doors, the fuel filler flap, and the trunk unlock; and the trunk lid opens. The vehicle production date (e.g. 09/01) can be found on the certification label, which is located on the driver’s door pillar, see page 391. The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 61 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built September 2001 and later) Important! The emergency trunk lid release button (1) does not open the trunk lid, if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. Illumination of the emergency release button (1): The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the trunk. The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. The emergency release button (1) is located in the trunk lid. Briefly press emergency release button (1). The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid opens. The vehicle production date (e.g. 09/01) can be found on the certification label, which is located on the driver’s door pillar, see page 391. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 61 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 62 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Antitheft alarm system Antitheft alarm system Practical hints Car care Technical data 62 The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately 15 seconds after locking the vehicle with the remote control or the lock button at each door handle (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO). A blinking lamp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed. Operation: Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when someone: • opens a door, • opens the trunk or • opens the hood. 1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed with the remote control or the KEYLESS-GO-function, by locking or unlocking the vehicle. The alarm will last approximately 21/2 minutes in form of flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door for example) is immediately closed. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid on page 216. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 63 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Notes: When you unlock the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. To cancel the alarm: • insert the electronic key in the starter switch, • press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key or • vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when carrying the KEYLESS-GO-card, grasp the door handle or press the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever. Antitheft alarm system Instruments and controls Operation 63 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 64 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tow-away alarm Tow-away alarm Practical hints Car care Technical data 64 The Tow-away alarm is armed within approximately 30 seconds if both doors and the trunk are closed and the vehicle are locked with the remote control or the lock button at each door handle (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO). Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when someone attempts to raise the vehicle. The alarm will last approximately 21/2 minutes in form of flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm: • insert the electronic key in the starter switch, The switch is located in the center console. 1 Press to switch off 2 Indicator lamp • press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key or • vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when carrying the KEYLESS-GO-card, grasp the door handle or press the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid on page 216. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 65 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with the electronic key or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) the lock button at each door handle. To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train. The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the vehicle is locked again with the electronic key or the lock button at each door handle (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) at which time it is automatically reactivated. To do so, turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 0, or remove electronic key from starter switch. Press tow-away alarm switch (1). The indicator lamp (2) illuminates briefly. Tow-away alarm Instruments and controls 65 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 66 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Easy-entry/exit feature Easy-entry/exit feature Practical hints Car care Technical data 66 With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards to allow easier entry into and exit from the vehicle when the driver’s door is opened. However, the engine must be turned off. When the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch or, with a valid KEYLESS-GO-card, when pressing the start-/stop button on the gear selector lever, and if the driver’s door is closed, the steering wheel returns to the last position set for it. Warning! The switch is located on the steering column adjustment lever. Turn the switch in direction: 1 to switch on 2 to switch off You must ensure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel with the easy-entry/exit feature activated and you open the driver’s door or remove the electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 67 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Front seat adjustment Never place hands under seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Warning! When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. The power seats can also be operated with the driver’s or front passenger door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Seats Instruments and controls To operate the front power seat adjustment switches, turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2 (with a front door open, the respective power seats can also be operated with the electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0). 67 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 68 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 68 Note: 4 2 Do not move the front passenger seat completely forward if objects are stored in the parcel net in the front passenger side footwell. Items in the net may be damaged. 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 2 Seat, up/down Press the switch (up/down direction) until comfortable seating position with still sufficient headroom is reached. 3 Seat cushion tilt Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until your legs are slightly supported. The switches are located in both doors. We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following order: 1 Seat adjustment, fore/aft Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a comfortable seating position is reached that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls. 4 Backrest tilt Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. 5 Seat cushion depth Press the switch fore or aft until your legs are supported comfortably. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 69 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 6 7 6 Head restraint The height of the head restraint is adjusted automatically with the seat so that the back of the head is supported approximately at ear level. Adjust the head restraint using the switch if the preset position does not support the back of your head approximately at ear level. Adjust the head restraint angle (7) by hand. Push or pull the head restraint in direction of arrow. Storing seat positions The head restraint, steering wheel and rear view mirror positions are stored together with the seat position. See page 111 for notes on the memory function. For recalling a stored seat/steering wheel/rear view mirror position see page 112. For steering wheel adjustment, see page 105; inside rear view mirror, see page 106; exterior rear view mirrors, see page 107. Seats Instruments and controls 69 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 70 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 70 Important! Warning! Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should adjust the seat height for proper vision as well as fore/aft placement and backrest angle to insure adequate control, reach, operation, and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag section on page 92 for proper seat positioning. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation, and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rearward vision. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts should be done before the vehicle is put into motion. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 71 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints Note: Tilt the backrest rearward for easier removal and installation of the head restraints. To remove: Press switch (1) downwards and hold until the head restraint is fully retracted. Pull head restraint out with one strong jerking movement. 1 To install: Press switch (1) downwards and hold for about 5 seconds. Press the head restraint down until it engages. Adjust head restraint to the desired position. P91.16-2030-26 Warning! Caution! For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Do not remove head restraints except when mounting seat covers. Whenever restraints have been removed be sure to reinstall them before driving. Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Seats Instruments and controls 71 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 72 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 72 Backrest Warning! The seat belts provide protection only with the backrest locked in place and, therefore, must be locked in place with the vehicle in motion. Do not drive the vehicle when the backrest is not locked in place. If the warning message “SEAT BACKREST LEFT – LOCK!” or “SEAT BACKREST RIGHT – LOCK!” is displayed in the multifunction display, then the respective backrest is not engaged in its lock. Carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is in a safe distance from the roadway. Always provide sufficient room behind the backrest and fold the backrest all the way back until it locks in place. Folding forward: Lift release lever and fold backrest forward. The seat will automatically slide forward and the head restraint will move down. Folding back: Lift release lever and fold backrest back. The seat and head restraint return to their previous positions. To interrupt the procedure, activate the power seat switch located in the front door. The warning message is no longer displayed as soon as the backrest is locked in place. If both backrests are locked in place and the warning message is still displayed, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you, and lock your vehicle. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 73 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Notes: The power seats can also be operated with the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. The automatic seat slide is provided with a safety feature. The automatic process is interrupted, if the backrest of the sliding seat is pushed against an occupant or object. The seat will slide forward and stop. Never place hands under seat or near any moving parts during a seat adjustment procedure. Investigate and correct the cause of interruption. Now use memory button (page 112) or power seat switch (page 68) to bring seat into desired position. When folding the backrest forward from a reclined position, and then folding it back, the backrest stops in a more upright position for the safety of any rear-seat passenger. Adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel, see page 68. Seats Instruments and controls 73 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 74 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Technical data Car care 74 Lumbar support (optional) Multicontour backrest (optional) 2 1 3 4 1 P91.10-2089-26 The thumbwheels are located on the sides of the front seats. The seats have an inflatable air cushion built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar support. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. The inflation pressure of the air cushion can be continuously varied between position “0” (no pressure) and position “5” (maximum pressure) by changing the pressure regulator (1) setting. The switch clusters are located on the sides of the front seats. 1 Lumbar region 2 Center section 3 Backrest side cushions 4 Massage function (PULSE) Index J_OM_215.book Seite 75 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 3 Backrest side cushions Some models may be equipped with multicontour seats. These seats have inflatable air cushions built into the backrests to provide additional lumbar and side support. The lateral support increases or decreases as you press the button to the right or left. Adjust the side cushions to provide good lateral support. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2 to operate. 4 Massage function (PULSE) We recommend that you make the basic settings in the following order: The multicontour backrest is equipped with a massage function to help prevent fatigue during longer journeys. 1 Lumbar region The PULSE function inflates and deflates the air cushions in the lumbar region rhythmically. Press j or k to select a lumbar region. Press and hold æ or ç to inflate or deflate the selected lumbar support. An indicator lamp on the switch lights up when the PULSE function is switched on. The PULSE function switches off automatically after approximately 8 minutes. 2 Center section Press æ or ç side of switch and hold; the air cushion will be inflated or deflated. Release the switch in the desired position. Seats Instruments and controls 75 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 76 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 76 Seat heater The seat heaters can be switched on with the electronic key in starter switch positions 1 or 2. The buttons are located on each door. Notes: When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the seat heater longer than necessary. The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too many power consumers are switched on at the same time or if the battery charge is low. In this case, one or both indicator lamps will blink. The seat heaters switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to you, the seat heaters can be switched off. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 77 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Vehicles without seat ventilation function: Normal heating mode: Press button (1). One indicator lamp in the switch lights up. The seat heater will be automatically switched off after approximately 30 minutes. 1 Rapid heating mode: Press button (2). Both indicator lamps in the switch light up. 2 The system switches over to normal heating mode automatically after approximately 5 minutes. P54.25-2131-26 Turning off the heater: Press button (1) or (2) again. The indicator lamps go out. The seat heater is switched off. Seats Instruments and controls 77 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 78 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 78 Vehicles with seat ventilation function: Rapid heating mode: Press button (3) once. Both red indicator lamps above the button light up. The system switches over to normal heating mode automatically after approximately 5 minutes. Normal heating mode: Press button (3) twice. One red indicator lamp above the button lights up. 3 P54.25-2132-26 The seat heater will be automatically switched off after approximately 30 minutes. Turning off the heater: Press the button (3) again. The indicator lamps go out. The seat heater is switched off. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 79 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Seat ventilation system (optional) The seat ventilators may automatically switch off if too many power consumers are switched on at the same time or if the battery charge is low. In this case, one or more indicator lamps will blink. The buttons are located on each door. Seat ventilation can be activated manually with the electronic key in starter switch positions 1 or 2, or by the summer opening function (driver’s seat only), see page 44. The seat ventilation switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to you, the seat ventilators can be switched off. Notes: The maximum ventilation level (level 3) is automatically selected if the driver’s seat ventilation is activated by the summer opening function, see page 44. When in operation, the seat ventilation system consumes a large amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the seat ventilator longer than necessary. Seats Instruments and controls 79 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 80 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 80 Level 2 ventilation setting (middle): Press button (1) again. Two blue indicator lamps above the button light up. Level 1 ventilation setting (minimum): Press button (1) again. One blue indicator lamp above the button lights up. Turning off the seat ventilation: Press button (1) again. The indicator lamps go out. The seat ventilation is switched off. 1 P54.25-2133-26 Manual activation: Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Level 3 ventilation setting (maximum): Press button (1). Three blue indicator lamps above the button light up. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 81 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! Power head restraints, rear For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints. Notes: Both head restraints fold up or back together. The head restraints will position themselves automatically when the seats are occupied (seat belt buckled). The switches are located on the front and rear center console. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Activate switch: 1 Place head restraints upright. 2 Fold head restraints backward. Seats Instruments and controls 81 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 82 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 82 Seat belts and integrated restraint system Warning! Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats, emergency tensioning retractors, dual front airbags, side impact airbags for driver, front and rear passengers, and head protective window curtain airbags. Their protective functions are designed to complement one another. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. Seat belts Important! Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require seat belt use. All states and provinces require use of child restraints that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. All child restraints systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly recommend their use. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 83 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Warning! Seat belt nonusage warning system The seat belts provide protection only with the backrest locked in place. Do not drive the vehicle when the backrest is not locked in place. If the warning message “SEAT BACKREST LEFT – LOCK!” or “SEAT BACKREST RIGHT – LOCK!” is displayed in the multifunction display, then the respective backrest is not engaged in its lock. For backrest see page 72. With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, a warning sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Automatic comfort-fit seat belt: An automatic comfort-fit feature for driver and front passenger seat belt is activated when the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 2. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation The retraction force of the inertia reel is reduced, increasing the level of seat belt comfort. Note: For cleaning and care of the seat belts see page 388. 83 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 84 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 84 Warning! Warning! Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 85 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Fastening seat belts 1 Latch plate 2 Buckle 3 Release button Push the latch plate (1) into the buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause injury. 1 3 To help avoid severe or fatal injuries, the lap belt should be positioned as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. 2 Warning! Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained – even those sitting in the rear. Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. P91.40-2001-27 P91.40-2063-27 Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 85 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 86 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care 86 Operation of seat belts Warning! The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during sudden stops or when quickly pulling on the belt. USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY. The locking function of the reel may be checked by quickly pulling out the belt. Caution! For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or seat back into positions which could affect the correct seat belt positioning. Unfastening of seat belts Press release button (3) in the belt buckle (2). Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate (1). Technical data • Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident. • Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes “SRS” (driver airbag, front passenger airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain airbags for side windows), “ETR” (seat belt emergency tensioning retractors), and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags) and side (side impact and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 87 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 • Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. • Each seat belt should never be used for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects. • Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries. • Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries. • Pregnant women should also use a lapshoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. • Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation • Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. 87 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 88 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Warning! USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in the back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Practical hints Car care Technical data 88 Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning. BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front airbag will not deploy. The 7 indicator lamp located on the center console will be illuminated, except with electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0. The system does not deactivate the door mounted side impact airbag. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 89 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed Warning! The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. After turning electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp located on the center console comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then extinguishes. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of protecting the child. If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat. See page 302 for notes on the 7 indicator lamp. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats. The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated. Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat. Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the light remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 89 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 90 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Supplemental restraint system (SRS) Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were designed to operate, and do not afford any protection whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not designed to deploy. The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to activate either the emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the direction and severity of the impact exceeding the preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened. Practical hints Car care Technical data 90 Seat belt fastened • first threshold exceeded: ETR activates • second threshold exceeded: airbag also activates Seat belt not fastened Front seats: • first threshold exceeded: airbag activates, not ETR Rear seats: • first threshold exceeded: ETR activates Driver and front passenger and rear seat systems operate independently of each other. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 91 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, rollovers, certain side impacts, or other accidents without sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner. The seat belts for the front and rear seats are equipped with emergency tensioning retractors. These tensioning retractors are located in each belt’s inertia reel and become operationally ready with the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2. The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to activate only when the seat belts are fastened during frontal impacts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS and in rear impacts exceeding a preset severity level. They remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body restricting its forward movement as much as possible. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation Note: The front passenger ETR activates only if the front passenger seat is occupied. Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to deploy and the ETR to activate in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold. 91 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 92 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 92 Airbags 1 Driver airbag Front airbags 2 Front passenger airbag The most effective occupant restraint system yet developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt. In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat belt can be further enhanced by an airbag. 2 In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver and front passenger airbags can provide increased protection for the driver and front passenger in certain frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds. Side impact and head protection window curtain airbags can provide increased protection to belted occupants on the impacted side of the vehicle in side impacts exceeding its preset threshold. 1 The operational readiness of the airbag system is verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go out after approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the components and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a malfunction by coming on again. If the lamp does not Index J_OM_215.book Seite 93 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after approximately 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a malfunction in the system has been detected. In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp has gone out following the initial check, interruptions or short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses, and low voltage in the entire system are detected and indicated. The following system components are monitored or undergo a self-check: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition circuits, front seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning retractors, seat sensor. Warning! Initially, when the electronic key is turned from starter switch position 0 to position 1 or 2, malfunctions in the crash sensor are detected and indicated (the “SRS” indicator lamp stays on longer than 4 seconds or does not come on). In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Note: See page 299 for information on the supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 93 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 94 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems The driver and passenger front airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset threshold. The front passenger airbag deploys only if the front passenger seat is occupied and the 7 indicator lamp on the center console is not illuminated. Practical hints Car care Technical data 94 Note: Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to deploy in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 95 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Side impact airbags, window curtain airbags Side impact airbags The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only the side impact airbags on the impacted side of the vehicle deploy. 4 The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys only if the front passenger seat is occupied. 3 The side impact airbag for the right rear passenger deploys only if a preset threshold is exceeded. The side impact airbag for the left rear passenger deploys together with the side impact airbag for the driver. 3 Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a properly positioned and fastened seat belt. 3 Side impact airbags Note: 4 Window curtain airbags Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the front passenger side impact airbag to deploy in a crash. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 95 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 96 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Window curtain airbags The head protection window curtain airbags afford greater protection against injuries to the head and upper body. They fill up in the area between the A and C pillars (see arrows) between the side windows and an occupant’s head. The window curtain airbags are designed to activate only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only the head protection window curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys. Important! Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset thresholds. Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their supplemental protection. The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection. Practical hints Car care Technical data 96 In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other accidents, the airbags will not be activated. The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. Warning! Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which may cause significant injuries, however, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 97 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags which are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash protection for occupants. • Sit properly belted in an upright position with your back against the backrest. • Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belt. • Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your body. • Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front airbag inflates. Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye: Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation • Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. 97 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 98 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems • Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door or rear quarter interior trim panel where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered. Always sit upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system. • Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. Practical hints Car care Technical data 98 Warning! Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn off the passenger side airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any side impact airbag. It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 99 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the front door or rear quarter trim panels where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear quarter trim panel mounted side airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written election to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details. 99 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 100 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag Warning! • Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. • Airbags and “ETR’s” are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) that was activated must be replaced. • No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the “SRS”, the installation of additional trim material, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, front passenger airbag cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/ electronic equipment on or near “SRS” components and wiring. Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). Practical hints Car care Technical data 100 • Do not pass belts over sharp edges. • Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts. • Do not use handles or coat hooks above doors and rear windows for placing such items as coat hangers etc.. • An airbag system component within the steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has inflated. Do not touch. • Improper work on the system, including incorrect installation and removal, can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the “SRS”. • In addition, through improper work there is a risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 101 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an “SRS” by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual. • For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning retractor, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. • Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 101 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 102 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 102 Infant and child restraint systems Important! We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints. The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states and all Canadian provinces. To activate, pull shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner. Note: For child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages refer to page 104 (installation of infant and child restraint systems). Warning! Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint. When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 103 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Warning! Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without one. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 103 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 104 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 104 Installation of infant and child restraint systems 1 P91.40-2205-26 This vehicle is provided with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions. Prior to installing a tether strap, remove cover (1) from anchorage ring (2) and store in a convenient place (e.g. glove box). To secure a tether strap to the anchorage, securely fasten the hook (3), which is part of the tether strap, to the anchorage ring (2). For safety, please make sure that the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch, as illustrated. After removing the tether strap, reinstall the cover (1). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 105 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Steering wheel adjustment 2 Warning! 1 Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose the control of the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, and take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you. The steering wheel adjustment feature can also be operated with the driver’s door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. 2 P68.00-2011-26 The stalk is located on the steering column. 1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten column To adjust the steering wheel position, turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. With the driver’s door open, the steering wheel can also be operated with the electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0. However any adjustment will be cancelled and the steering wheel will return to it’s position stored in memory if the driver’s door is closed or the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch. Steering wheel adjustment Instruments and controls Operation 1 Move the stalk to the front or rear. 2 Steering column, height Move the stalk up or down. Note: The steering wheel adjustment can be stored together with the seat and mirror adjustment. See page 111 for notes on the memory function. 105 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 106 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Rear view mirrors Practical hints Car care Technical data 106 Rear view mirrors Note: Inside rear view mirror The automatic antiglare function does not react, if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the inside rear view mirror. Manually adjust the inside rear view mirror. Storing inside rear view mirror positions The inside rear view mirror position is stored in memory with the seat/steering wheel/exterior rear view mirror positions and can be recalled when necessary. See page 111 for notes on the memory function. Inside rear view mirror, automatic antiglare Antiglare mode: With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in light sensitivity. With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does not respond to changes in light sensitivity. The automatic antiglare function will not react for example, if the rear window sun shade is in raised position. Warning! In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 107 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Exterior rear view mirrors Exterior rear view mirror adjustment Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. Push button to select mirror to be adjusted: Driver’s side – Push button (1). Passenger side – Push button (2). 2 1 Push the adjustment button (3) up, down, left or right according to the setting desired. 3 4 Note: The exterior rear view mirrors have electrically heated glass. The heater switches on automatically, depending on outside temperature. P88.70-2023-26 The buttons are located on the driver’s door. Storing exterior rear view mirror positions Warning! The exterior rear view mirror positions are stored in memory with the seat/steering wheel/inside rear view mirror positions and can be recalled when necessary. See page 111 for notes on the memory function. Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Rear view mirrors Instruments and controls Operation 107 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 108 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Rear view mirrors Parking position The passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and programmed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers (e.g. to observe the curb or other objects close to the vehicle). With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, and the exterior rear view mirror switch in the passenger side position, the passenger side mirror will be turned downward when placing the gear selector lever in “R” reverse. The passenger side mirror will return to its previous position: • immediately at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) – independent of the engaged gear, • after 10 seconds when shifting gear selector lever from “R” Reverse, • by pressing the driver’s side mirror button %. Practical hints Car care Technical data 108 To store passenger side mirror parking position: 1. The vehicle must be stationary. Turn electronic key to starter switch position 1 or 2. 2. Select passenger side mirror & and adjust the mirror to view the curb. 3. Push the memory button “M” (4). 4. Within 3 seconds push bottom of adjustment button (3). The mirror should not move. Repeat the memory procedure if the mirror moves. Note: One stored parking position is available for each of the two electronic keys or for both KEYLESS-GO-cards (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 109 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Exterior rear view mirrors, electrically folding Important! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), it must be repositioned manually by applying firm pressure until it snaps back into place. If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), press button (2) to fold mirrors in, then press button (1) to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirror by hand. 2 1 Before running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold mirrors in, otherwise they might get damaged. P88.70-2024-26 Note: The buttons are located on the driver’s door. The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not completely folded out. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. 1 Push button briefly to fold both exterior rear view mirrors out. 2 Push button briefly to fold both exterior rear view mirrors in. Rear view mirrors Instruments and controls Operation 109 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 110 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Rear view mirrors Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror, antiglare mode Antiglare mode: With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in light sensitivity. Practical hints Car care Technical data 110 Warning! In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass breaks. With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does not respond to changes in light sensitivity. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. Note: Important! The automatic antiglare function does not react, if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the inside rear view mirror. Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state, by applying plenty of water. The automatic antiglare function will not react for example, if the rear window sun shade is in raised position. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 111 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Memory function Warning! Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Three sets of seat and multicontour backrest positions may be stored into memory. Together with the driver’s seat position you can store the positions for steering wheel, exterior rear view mirrors and inside rear view mirror. Three stored positions are available for each of the two electronic keys or for both KEYLESS-GO-cards (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO). For notes regarding the storing of key dependent memory positions, see page 113. The memory and stored position buttons are located on the doors. 1 Memory button, used to store selected positions which can be retrieved by pressing the buttons (2) 2 Stored position buttons Memory function Instruments and controls 111 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 112 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Memory function Storing positions into memory Driver’s seat: with the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2 or with the driver’s door open. Front passenger seat: with electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2 or the passenger door open. Adjust the seat and multicontour backrest to the desired position. You can also adjust the steering wheel, the exterior rear view mirrors electrically and the inside rear view mirror by hand for the driver’s seat. See page 67 for front seat adjustment, page 107 for exterior rear view mirror adjustment and page 105 for steering wheel adjustment. Push memory button “M”, release and push a stored position button “1”,“ 2” or “3” within 3 seconds. Recalling positions from memory To recall a seat/steering wheel/rear view mirror position, push and hold button “1”, “2” or “3” until seat, steering wheel and rear view mirror movement has stopped. The seat /steering wheel/rear view mirror movement stops when the button is released. Practical hints Car care Technical data 112 Caution! Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats. First move backrest to an upright position. Important! Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust if necessary the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and backrest angle to insure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag section for proper seat positioning. In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rearward vision. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 113 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Key dependent memory settings All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts should be done before the vehicle is put into motion. The setting of the automatic climate control and the memory settings are stored together for each individual electronic key or for both KEYLESS-GO-cards (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) when the electronic key is removed from the starter switch or when the vehicle is locked using the KEYLESS-GO-card. Warning! Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. The stored settings are activated when the electronic key is inserted into the starter switch or when the vehicle is unlocked using the KEYLESS-GO-card (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO). See page 111 for Memoryfunction and page 168 for automatic climate control. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Memory function Instruments and controls 113 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 114 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 114 Instrument cluster P54.30-3528-29 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 115 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 12 Multifunction display, see page 120 Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display, see page 303 1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination, see page 116 2 Engine malfunction indicator lamp, see page 296 13 Trip odometer, see page 119 and 124 3 Brake fluid low or parking brake engaged, see page 307 14 Main odometer, see page 124 4 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) malfunction indicator lamp, see page 299 15 Right turn signal indicator lamp, see combination switch on page 164 5 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 117 16 Tachometer, see page 119 6 Outside temperature indicator, see page 117 17 Gear range indicator display, see selector lever positions on page 238 7 Fuel gauge with reserve warning lamp, see page 299 18 Digital clock To set the time, see COMAND operator’s manual 8 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see combination switch on page 164 19 Antilock brake system (ABS) malfunction indicator lamp, see page 300 9 Speedometer, see page 118 10 Electronic stability program (ESP) warning lamp, system is adjusting to road conditions, see page 301 20 High beam headlamp indicator, see exterior lamp switch, page 159, and combination switch, page 164 11 Distance warning lamp – vehicles with Distronic (DTR), distance to the vehicle ahead is insufficient, see page 270 and page 301. 21 Fasten seat belts, see page 302 22 Reset button J, see pages 116, 119 Vehicles without Distronic: It illuminates with the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It should go out when the engine is running. Instrument cluster Instruments and controls Operation 115 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 116 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Instrument cluster Activating the instrument cluster display The instrument cluster is activated by: Practical hints Car care Technical data 116 Display illumination, changing basic settings for driving at dusk or in darkness: • Opening the door1. Press adjusting knob (1) – the knob will pop out. • Pressing button J on the instrument cluster1. Rotate adjusting knob (1) clockwise – instrument lamp intensity increases. • Turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Rotate adjusting knob (1) counterclockwise – instrument lamp intensity decreases. • Switching on the exterior lamps. Push knob back into panel. 1 The instrument cluster is activated for approximately 30 seconds. Note: Instrument cluster illumination It is not possible to select a basic brightness setting in daylight – the intensity is adjusted automatically. The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit daylight lighting conditions. The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted when the vehicle’s exterior lamps are switched on. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 117 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Coolant temperature gauge (5) Outside temperature indicator (6) During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red marking. Warning! The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.). Warning! • Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. • Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down. Adaption to ambient temperature takes place in steps and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stopand-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of temperature change. Note: The unit for the temperature indicator display can be set in the individual setting menu “INST. CLUSTER” – “TEMP. INDICATOR”, see page 142. Instrument cluster Instruments and controls Operation 117 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 118 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Instrument cluster Practical hints Car care Technical data 118 Speedometer (9) Note: When the cruise control is activated, the segments on the speedometer scale between the set speed to the top of the scale are illuminated. Cruise control, see page 256. The speed display is set to read out for When the Distronic (DTR) is activated, one or two segments around the speed stored in memory light up in the speedometer dial. Distronic (DTR), see page 259. The unit for the speed display can be adjusted in the individual setting menu “INST. CLUSTER” – “SPEEDOMETER” on page 142. • USA in mph • Canada in km/h. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 119 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Trip odometer (13) Tachometer (16) To reset to “0” miles/km: The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed. Activate the instrument cluster if it is not already activated by pressing the J button on the instrument cluster. Avoid this engine speed, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears if it is not displayed. See page 124. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking. Press button J on the instrument cluster until the trip odometer is reset. Instrument cluster Instruments and controls Operation 119 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 120 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints 120 Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 121 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 4 Navigation system, see page 134 Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, you may use the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to call up, control and set the following systems in the multifunction display: 5 Distronic (DTR), see page 259 6 Trip computer, see page 136 After start After reset Range 1 Trip odometer and main odometer, see page 119 and page 124 Flexible service system (FSS), see page 150 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see page 153 Engine oil level indicator, see page 157 7 Malfunction message memory, see page 138 8 Individual settings, see page 140 2 Audio systems, see page 126 9 Malfunction messages are stored in memory (7), see page 138. Radio, see page 126 CD player, see page 127 Cassette player, see page 128 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed. 3 Telephone, see page 129 The display advances by one system each time the button is pressed. You may call up additional displays within some of these categories by pressing the j or k button. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 121 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 122 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 122 Warning! Note: A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/ her primary focus when driving. The displays in the multifunction display can be set to German, English, French, Italian or Spanish language. See “SETTINGS” – “INST. CLUSTER” – “TEXT”, on page 142 for instructions on changing the language setting. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player, cassette player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 123 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. 1 Press button: 4 j for next display in system 5 k for previous display in system 2 6 è for next system 7 ÿ for previous system 4 5 8 3 3 6 8 æ to increase the volume, see page 149 9 7 9 ç to decrease the volume, see page 149 10 10 í to dial a telephone number, see page 129 11 11 ì to end a call See page 129 for telephone and page 133 for instructions on answering an incoming call. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed. P46.10-2100-27 1 Multifunction steering wheel The display advances by one system each time the button is pressed. 2 Multifunction display You may call up additional displays in some systems by pressing the j or k button. 3 Horn pad Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 123 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 124 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Trip and main odometer and sub menu Practical hints 124 Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 125 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Press è or ÿ button repeatedly until the trip and main odometer display (1) appears. 1 Trip odometer and main odometer See page 119 for instructions on resetting the trip odometer. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the required display (2, 3, 4, 5, 1) appears. 2 FSS (Flexible service system), see page 150 Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. 3 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see page 153 4 Engine oil level indicator, see page 157 5 Vehicle speed Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 125 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 126 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 126 Audio systems 1 Audio system is switched off. Radio 2 The radio is switched on. 3 Wave band setting and memory location number, where appropriate. 4 Station name setting or station frequency. 5 This only appears when “MEMORY” rather than “FREQUENCY” has been selected in the “SETTINGS” – “VEHICLE” – “STATION SEARCH USING” menu. See page 147. Switch on the radio, see COMAND operator’s manual. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until display (2) appears. Press button j or k repeatedly until the required station or frequency is displayed. Use the j of k button to select a stored station or station frequency. This depends on the selection made in the “STATION SEARCH USING” setting menu. See page 140. P54.30-2936-27 Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 127 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 CD player 1 Audio system is switched off. 2 The CD player is switched on. 3 The number of the CD currently playing is displayed if you are using a CD changer. 4 Track number. Switch on the CD player, see COMAND operator’s manual. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until display (2) appears. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the required track number (4) is displayed. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Note: To select a CD from the magazine (only vehicles with CD changer), press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 127 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 128 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Cassette player Practical hints Car care Technical data 128 1 Audio system is switched off. 2 The cassette player is switched on. 3 Side being played. Switch on the cassette player, see COMAND operator’s manual. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until display (2) appears. Pressing the j button fast forwards on to the next track. Pressing the k button rewinds the cassette to the beginning of the current track. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Notes: To select the reverse side of the tape, enter request on the COMAND system located in the center dashboard. To eject the inserted tape, press “EJT” on the COMAND system located in the center dashboard. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 129 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Telephone 1 The telephone is switched off. Telephone book 2 The vehicle is currently outside the transmitter or receiver range. 3 The telephone is ready for use. 4 Name selected from the telephone book. 5 Number for the name selected. Dialing commences. 6 Dialing is completed. The name is displayed. The display remains for the duration of the call. 7 Memory location number. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 129 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 130 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display The telephone and COMAND system must be switched on. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the display (3) appears. See the separate telephone instructions manual. If display (2) appears, no service is available. Pressing j or k “browses” alphabetically forwards or backwards through the telephone book, providing it was previously downloaded. See telephone operator’s manual for details concerning downloading. Pressing button j or k for longer than a second “browses” rapidly through the telephone book. The name selected appears in the display. Note: Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call. The procedure is cancelled and display (3) appears. Practical hints Car care Technical data 130 Press the í button when the name you require appears in the display (4). The telephone number (5) is dialed. The name will be displayed when dialing is completed. Display (6) remains for the duration of the call. Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (3) appears. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 131 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Redialing 1 The telephone is ready for use. 2 Number or name stored in the redial memory. 3 Number in the redial memory — redialing has commenced. 4 Dialing is completed and the name stored in the telephone book is displayed or the number dialed will remain displayed if no name has been stored. The display remains for the duration of the call. 5 Memory location numbers — the 10 most recently dialed numbers are stored. L0, most recently dialed number, L1 to L9, previously dialed numbers. P54.30-2899-27 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 131 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 132 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display The telephone and COMAND system must be switched on. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the display (1) appears. Practical hints Car care Technical data 132 Press the í button when the required number or name appears in the display (2). The telephone number (3) is dialed. Pressing the í button activates the redial memory and the most recently dialed number is displayed. Once dialing is completed the name (4) is displayed if the name is stored in the telephone book; failing that the number dialed will remain displayed. The display remains for the duration of the call. Pressing the j or k button “browses” forward or backwards through the redial memory. The number or name selected appears in the display. Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (1) appears. Note: Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call. The procedure is cancelled and display (1) appears. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 133 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Incoming call 1 “CALL” — you are being called. Press the í button to answer the call. Press the ì button to hang up or if you do not wish to answer the incoming call. The telephone must be switched on. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 133 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 134 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Navigation system Practical hints Car care Technical data 134 1 The navigation system is switched off. 2 The navigation system is switched on but no destination has been specified. 3 The navigation system is switched on and destination guidance is active. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed. See the separate COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) instruction manual for notes on the navigation system. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. P54.30-2985-27 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 135 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Distronic (DTR) 1 Distronic (DTR) is deactivated. The actual distance (4) and the should-be distance (5) to the vehicle in front (3) are displayed. 2 Distronic (DTR) is activated. The display shows the selected speed for approximately 5 seconds. 3 Distronic (DTR) is activated. The message “DTR OFF” appears for five seconds when Distronic is being deactivated. 4 Vehicle ahead. Only appears if a vehicle is detected ahead. 5 Actual distance to vehicle ahead. 6 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead. 7 Own vehicle. 8 Distance warning function is activated, see page 270. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed. Distronic (DTR), see page 259. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 135 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 136 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Trip computer Practical hints Car care Technical data 136 1 “AFTER START” — short distance memory 2 “AFTER RESET” — long distance memory 3 “RANGE” — estimated range remaining 4 Distance covered “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” 5 Elapsed time “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” 6 Average speed “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” 7 Average fuel consumption “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” Press the button è or ÿ repeatedly until the display (1, 2 or 3) appears. Press the j or k button until the “AFTER START” short distance memory (1), the “AFTER RESET” long distance memory (2) or the “RANGE” – estimated range remaining indicator (3) appears. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Note: The most recently selected display (1, 2 or 3) always appears the next time the trip computer is called up. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 137 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Transferring values from the previous journey to the “AFTER START” short distance memory (1): To reset the short “AFTER START” (1) or long “AFTER RESET” distance memory (2): The “AFTER START” display will flash until a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) has been covered or two minutes have elapsed since the engine was restarted. During this period you can incorporate the values for the previous journey by pressing button J in the instrument cluster. Call up the relevant display (1 or 2) using the j or k button and press the J button in the instrument cluster until the values are reset to “0”. If button J is not pressed, the short distance memory is reset to “0”. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 137 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 138 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Malfunction/warning message memory Practical hints Car care Technical data 138 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the message memory (1 or 2) is displayed. Press the j or k button if display (2) appears. The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See page 303 for malfunction and warning messages. Display (2) will reappear after you have scanned all the malfunction and warning messages. Should any malfunction or warning messages be stored while driving, they will reappear in the display (2) when the electronic key in starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch. The malfunction or warning messages will now be displayed for approximately 5 seconds each. Pressing the J button in the instrument cluster displays the next malfunction and warning message immediately. 1 There are no messages stored in the system. 2 Number of messages stored in the system. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 139 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! The message memory will be cleared when the electronic key is turned in the starter switch to position 1 or 2. Should any subsequent faults occur, they will be displayed in the message memory. Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and displayed to a low level of detail. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages. See page 303. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 139 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 140 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Individual settings Practical hints Car care Technical data 140 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings. 2 “SETTINGS” – the requested menu can be called up in this options menu: “INST. CLUSTER”, see page 142. “LIGHTING”, see page 144. “VEHICLE”, see page 147. R These three menus contain additional submenus. Individual settings can be selected in these submenus. 3 Selection marker Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. R 4 See below for instructions on returning the setting menus to the factory settings. 5 Acknowledgment Index J_OM_215.book Seite 141 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. To return menu “SETTINGS” (2) to its factory setting: Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. • Call up the individual setting preliminary display (1). Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker (3) in setting menu (2). • Press the J button in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. Display (4) will appear. “INST. CLUSTER”, see page 142. • Press the J Button once more. The menu “SETTINGS” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (5). “LIGHTING”, see page 144. “VEHICLE”, see page 147. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear if you do not press the J button within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Notes: Note: These settings may only be performed with the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving For safety reasons, the individual setting “LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP” in menu cannot be reset while driving, see page 144. If an attempt is made, the message “LIGHTING” – “CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING” will be displayed. 141 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 142 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 142 “INST. CLUSTER” (Instrument Cluster) 3 R Index J_OM_215.book Seite 143 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Press button æ or ç until the menu “INST. CLUSTER” is selected by the selection marker (3). 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 2 “SETTINGS” – the menu “INST. CLUSTER” can be called up in this option menu. Press the j or k button until the required display (4 to 6) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker. The settings made are stored and applied immediately. 3 Selection marker Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. 4 “TEMP. INDICATOR” – the unit set is displayed in the outside temperature display in the instrument cluster and in the automatic air conditioner display. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. 5 “SPEEDOMETER” – the unit set is displayed in the multifunction display To return menu “INST. CLUSTER” (4 to 6) to its factory setting: 6 “TEXT” – sets the language used in the multifunction display • Call up menu (4 to 6). 7 Returning the setting menu “INST. CLUSTER” to the factory setting. • Press the J button in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. Display (7) will appear. 8 Acknowledgment • Press the J button once more. The menu “INST. CLUSTER” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (8). The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will appear if you do not press the J button within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. For setting clock, see separate COMAND operator’s manual. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 143 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 144 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 144 “LIGHTING” R 7 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 145 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 2 “SETTINGS” – the menu “LIGHTING” can be called up in this option menu. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. 3 Selection marker Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. Press button æ or ç until the menu “LIGHTING” is selected by the selection marker (3). Press the j or k button until the required display (4 to 7) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker. The settings made are stored and applied immediately. 4 “LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP”1, 2, see page 160. 5 “LOCATOR LIGHTING”, see page 163. 6 “HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT-OFF”, see “Night security illumination” on page 162. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. 7 “INTERIOR LAMP DELAYED SHUT-OFF”, see “Interior lighting” on page 189. 8 Returning the setting menu “LIGHTING” to the factory setting. 9 Acknowledgment 1 Except Canada 2 For safety reasons, setting only possible while vehicle is standing still. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 145 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 146 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display To return menu “LIGHTING” (4 to 7) to its factory setting: • Call up menu (4 to 7). • Press the J button in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. Display (8) will appear. • Press the J button once more. The menu “LIGHTING” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (9). The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will appear if you do not press the J button within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Practical hints Car care Technical data 146 Note: For safety reasons, the individual setting “LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP” in menu cannot be reset while driving. If an attempt is made, the message “LIGHTING” – “CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING” will be displayed. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 147 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 “VEHICLE” (audio and central locking system) R 5 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 147 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 148 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 2 “SETTINGS” – the menu “VEHICLE” can be called up in this option menu. 3 Selection marker Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. 4 “STATION SEARCH USING” – radio adjustment “FREQUENCY”: use the j or k button to select a frequency. – radio adjustment “MEMORY”: use the j or k button to select a stored station (preset memory). 5 “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”, see automatic central locking on page 51. Practical hints Car care Technical data 148 Press button æ or ç until the menu “VEHICLE” is selected by the selection marker (3). Press the j or k button until the required display (4 or 5) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker. The settings made are stored and applied immediately. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. To return menu “VEHICLE” (4 and 5) to its factory setting: • Call up menu (4 or 5). 6 Returning the setting menu “VEHICLE” to the factory setting. • Press the J button in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. Display (6) will appear. 7 Acknowledgment • Press the J button once more. The menu “VEHICLE” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (7). The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will appear if you do not press the J button within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 149 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Setting the audio volume Setting button: You can only adjust the volume of the system currently in use. The volume setting for each system (audio, telephone, navigation and voice recognition system) is stored separately. æ increases the volume. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving ç reduces the volume. 149 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 150 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Flexible service system Practical hints Car care Technical data 150 Flexible service system (FSS) (service indicator) The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2, or while driving when reaching the service warning threshold. The symbols and messages indicate the type of service to be performed: 9 Service A ½ Service B One of the following messages will appear in the display (e.g. Service A): P54.30-2768-26 The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is directly related to the operating conditions of the vehicle. The symbol 9 or ½ appears together with a message in the multifunction indicator prior to the next suggested service. Depending on operating conditions throughout the year, the next service is calculated and displayed in days or distance remaining. “SERVICE A – IN xx DAYS” “SERVICE A – IN xx MILES” (Canada: KM) “SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS” “SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx MILES” (Canada: KM) “SERVICE A – PERFORM SERVICE” The next service due date is displayed either in days or in miles, depending on your driving style. Once the suggested service term has passed, the symbol and message appear for approximately 30 seconds and a signal sounds every time when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 151 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 The service indicator disappears automatically after 30 seconds or if button J on the instrument cluster is pressed. Note: When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such days not counted by the FSS can be added by your Mercedes-Benz Center. Calling up service indicator manually: Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. The interval between services is determined by the type of driving for which the vehicle is used. For example, driving at extreme speeds, and cold starts combined with short distance driving in which the engine does not reach operating normal temperature, reduce the interval between services. Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 124. Press button j or k until the FSS indicator appears. The next or previous system is displayed by pressing button è or ÿ. Important! The FSS indicator is not an engine oil level indicator. See page 157 for engine oil level indicator. Flexible service system Instruments and controls Operation 151 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 152 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Flexible service system Practical hints Car care Technical data 152 Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-Benz Center sets the counter mileage to 10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km). The multifunction display will show the question: “DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? – CONFIRM BY PRESSING RESET (R) BUTTON” The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so: Press button J on the instrument cluster again to reset the service indicator. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 124. Press button j or k until the FSS indicator appears. Press button J on the instrument cluster for approximately 2 seconds. The new service indicator is displayed with the reset distance of 10 000 miles (Canada 15 000 km). If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. However you choose to set your reference numbers, the scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet must be followed to properly care for your vehicle. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 153 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Tire inflation pressure monitor (optional for Canada) Inquiry of present tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, is monitored in all four wheels on the ground. A warning is issued to the driver in the case of a decrease in the inflation pressure in one or more of the tires. Warning! The tire inflation pressure monitor does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the label affixed on the fuel filler flap. See page 351 for tire inflation pressure. The tire inflation pressure monitor is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden loss of pressure (e.g. tire puncture caused by a foreign object). In this case bring vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the service brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Press è or ÿ button on the multifunction steering wheel until the display for trip and main odometer appears, see page 124. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the tire inflation pressure monitor is displayed. The present tire inflation pressure for each wheel is displayed in multifunction display. Tire inflation pressure monitor Instruments and controls Operation 153 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 154 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tire inflation pressure monitor Practical hints Car care Technical data 154 Notes: Activation of tire inflation pressure monitor Following a tire inflation pressure reactivation process the real tire inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes travel time. Activation of tire inflation pressure monitor is necessary if tire inflation pressure is being changed, wheels or tires are replaced, or new wheels are installed on the vehicle. Possible differences between readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s multifunction display can occur. The vehicle’s multifunction display of the tire inflation pressure monitor is a more precise reading. Tire inflation pressure should be checked and corrected according to the label affixed inside the fuel filler flap. For a detailed description, refer to page 351. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (the engine must not be running). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 155 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Press button æ (“YES”) on the multifunction steering wheel to activate the tire inflation pressure monitor. The message “TIRE PRESS. MONITOR – ACTIVATED!” – “PRESS. DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINS.” appears in the multifunction display. The tire inflation pressure monitor is now activated and monitors the presently selected tire pressure for all four wheels on the ground. Press button ç (“NO”) on the multifunction steering wheel to cancel the activation. Repeat above steps if the multifunction display shows the message “REACTIVATE – TIRE PRESS. MONITOR!”. A multifunction display showing the message “TIRE PRESSURE – CHECK TIRES!” indicates a much too low tire inflation pressure. Check and correct tire inflation pressure again on all wheels, and repeat the tire inflation pressure monitor activation steps listed above. Press è or ÿ button on the multifunction steering wheel until the display for trip and main odometer appears, see page 124. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the tire inflation pressure monitor appears. Press and hold button J on the instrument cluster until the message “CHECK CURRENT TIRE PRESSURE?” appears. Release button J. Tire inflation pressure monitor Instruments and controls Operation 155 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 156 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tire inflation pressure monitor Notes: To ensure proper functioning of the tire inflation pressure monitor, the tire inflation pressure should be checked and corrected according to the label affixed inside the fuel filler flap. For a detailed description, refer to page 351. The message “REACTIVATE – TIRE PRESS. MONITOR” appears if the tire inflation pressure shows an increase of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar) or more. Reactivate the tire inflation pressure monitor. The tire inflation pressure monitor only functions on wheels equipped with the proper electronic sensors. Inquire at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about retrofitting other than original Mercedes-Benz wheels with electronic sensors. Transporting a deflated road wheel in the vehicle, e.g. after having a flat, the tire inflation pressure monitor should only be activated once the flat tire and rim are removed from the vehicle. Practical hints Car care Technical data 156 To prevent possible damage to the electronic sensors, have tire changes only performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For malfunction and warning messages, see page 318. When checking the tire inflation pressure of the road wheels, also check the spare tire. The tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel, mounted or not mounted, is not monitored by the tire inflation pressure monitor. See page 341 for location of the spare wheel, and page 351 for tire inflation pressure. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 157 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 • with engine not at operational temperature up to approximately 30 minutes. Engine oil level indicator The engine oil level check can be repeated after a short time. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 124. Press button j or k on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the “CORRECT MEASUREMENT ONLY – IF VEHICLE LEVEL” engine oil level indicator appears. This indicator is only a reminder. Measurement can be cancelled by pressing button j or k if the vehicle is not parked on level ground. An incorrect reading will be recorded if you do not cancel the measurement. Move the vehicle to level ground and measure again. To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level ground, with engine at normal operational temperature. Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan. The electronic key in starter switch is not in position 2 if the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – IGNITION ON PLEASE” message appears. The message “OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD” (perform service [engine oil level check] on time) will be displayed if the required waiting period has not been observed after stopping the engine: The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – MEASUREMENT IN PROCESS” message is displayed after approximately 3 seconds. • with engine at operational temperature approximately 5 minutes. Engine oil level indicator Instruments and controls Operation 157 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 158 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine oil level indicator One of the following messages will subsequently appear on the indicator: “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – O.K.” No oil needs to be added. “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.0 QUART” (Canada: 1.0 L) “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.5 QUART” (Canada: 1.5 L) “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 2.0 QUART” (Canada: 2.0 L) Practical hints Car care Technical data 158 CL 500 and CL 55 AMG only: Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick, if it cannot be completed via the multifunction display. See “Checking engine oil level”, page 337. In this case we recommend that you have the system checked at a Mercedes-Benz Center. Notes: See malfunction and warning messages on page 303 and page 320 if an engine oil level indicator appears on the multifunction display when the engine is running. See “Checking engine oil level”, on page 337 for instructions on adding engine oil. The engine oil level cannot be checked while the engine is running. The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – NOT WHEN ENGINE ON” message will appear. “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – REDUCE OIL LEVEL” Do not overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Engine oil consumption The “MEASURING NOT POSSIBLE!” message will be displayed if a proper oil level check cannot be performed. The engine oil level check can be repeated after a short while. Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the break-in period. During the break-in period, higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal. Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in increased consumption. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 159 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) Exterior lamp switch ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops) ‡ Front fog lamps (pull out one stop) with parking lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Green indicator in lamp switch comes on. † Rear fog lamp (pull out to second detent) in addition to the front fog lamps. Yellow indicator in lamp switch comes on. Note: With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing lamps) are not switched off. P54.25-2390-26 Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation. M Off U Automatic headlamp mode, see below. C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps, licence plate lamps, instrument panel lamps) Canada only: When the engine is running, the low beam is additionally switched on. Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the exterior lamp switch is turned to position M or U. B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam headlamps (combination switch pushed forward). Exterior lamp switch Instruments and controls Operation 159 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 160 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamp switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 160 Headlamp mode Automatic headlamp mode Manual headlamp mode Turn exterior lamp switch to position U. The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp switch, see above. • Electronic key in starter switch position 1: Note: • Electronic key in starter switch position 2 and the engine running: With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, the low beam headlamps can not be switched off manually. Warning! The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. Switch on the vehicle lights by hand when driving or traffic conditions require you to do so. The parking lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. The low beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can still be switched on and off manually using the exterior lamp switch. Note: With the daytime running lamp mode activated, the low beam headlamps can not be switched off manually. The headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions. Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can not be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To activate the fog lamps turn exterior switch to position B. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 161 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Daytime running lamp mode • USA only: The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior lamp switch in position M. Turn exterior lamp switch to position M or U. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on. In low ambient light conditions the parking lamps will also switch on. To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP” on page 144. • Canada only: When shifting from a driving position to position “N” or “P”, the low beam switches off (3 minutes delay). Note: See page 159 for notes on the exterior lamp switch. For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should be turned to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. Exterior lamp switch Instruments and controls Operation 161 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 162 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamp switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 162 Night security illumination Note: Turn exterior lamp switch to position U. Within 10 minutes after closing the last door the night security illumination can be reactivated by opening a door. At low ambient light conditions and with the engine having been turned off, the exterior lamps (fog lamps and parking lamps) switch on for added illumination. After the last door has been closed the lamp-on time period commences. To activate the function see the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” –“HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT-OFF” on page 144. The lamp-on time period for night security illumination can be set at several different timed levels from 0 (off) to 60 seconds. If after switching the engine off, no doors are opened or if after opening the doors they are not closed, the night security illumination will switch off after approximately 60 seconds. Deactivating night security illumination temporarily: Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 0 then to position 2 and back to position 0 again before getting out of the vehicle. The night security illumination will not be activated when the door is opened. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 163 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Locator lighting Headlamp cleaning system Turn exterior lamp switch to position U. After unlocking the vehicle with the electronic key during darkness the fog lamps and parking lamps switch on for a approximately 40 seconds. The exterior lamps will be switched off when opening the driver’s door. 1 To activate the function see the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” –“LOCATOR LIGHTING” on page 144. P54.25-2391-26 Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-pressure water jet when you press the headlamp washer button (1). See page 340 for instructions on filling up the windshield/headlamp washer reservoir. Exterior lamp switch Instruments and controls Operation 163 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 164 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Combination switch Car care Technical data 164 3 High beam flasher (high beam available independent of exterior lamp switch position) Combination switch 4 Practical hints 4 Turn signals, right 4 5 Turn signals, left To signal minor directional changes, such as changing lanes on a highway, move combination switch briefly to the point of resistance only and release. The turn signals blink three times. 2 1 3 5 5 1 Low beam (exterior lamp switch position B) 2 High beam (exterior lamp switch position B) P54.25-2388-26 To operate the turn signals continuously, move the combination switch past the point of resistance (up or down). The switch is automatically canceled when the steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree. Turn signal failure If one of the turn signals fails, the turn signal indicator system flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 165 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 0 Off I 7 Intermittent wiping One initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by a rain sensor monitoring the wetness of the windshield. This will not occur with a front door open. Notes: With switch in this position, one wipe occurs when turning the electronic key in starter switch from position 0. However, this might cause scratches on a dry windshield. Turn combination switch to Off position before turning the electronic key in starter switch from position 0. 6 P54.25-2389-26 6 Press switch briefly: Single wipe without washer fluid (select only if windshield is wet). Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in presence of water spray at windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result. Push switch past resistance point: Windshield washer system, windshield wipers. See page 340 for instructions on filling the windshield/headlamp washer reservoir. II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed 7 Windshield wipers If the vehicle is standing still, the wiper will switch back to setting I, intermittent wiping. Combination switch Instruments and controls Operation 165 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 166 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Combination switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 166 Blocked windshield wipers Windshield wipers smear If the windshield wipers become blocked (for example, due to snow), switch off the wipers. If the windshield wipers smear the windshield, even during rain, activate the washer system as often as necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be mixed in the correct ratio. For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove electronic key from starter switch. Remove blockage. Activate combination switch again (electronic key in starter switch position 1). Emergency operation of windshield wipers In case of windshield wiper malfunction in switch positions I or III, turn combination switch to wiper setting II. Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. See page 340 for instructions on filling up the windshield/headlamp washer reservoir. Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing: MB windshield washer concentrate “S” and water. 1 part “S” to 100 parts water (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water). For temperature below freezing: MB windshield washer concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze. 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 167 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Hazard warning flasher switch Note: With the hazard warning flasher activated, the combination switch in position for either left or right turn, and the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2, only the respective left or right side turn signals will operate. The hazard warning flasher can be activated either manually via the switch located in the dashboard, or it is activated automatically at the time an airbag is deployed. To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once. To deactivate, press switch again. If hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press switch twice to deactivate. Hazard warning flasher Instruments and controls Operation 167 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 168 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Automatic climate control Instrument cluster display Practical hints Technical data Car care 168 Automatic climate control 8 7 2 9 1 3 4 5 12 6 11 10 3 P83.40-2298-29 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 169 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 1 Center air outlet, left, adjustable 6 Center air outlet, right, adjustable 2 Fixed air outlet, left 7 Fixed air outlet, right 3 Air volume control for left center air outlet 8 Side defroster outlet, left and right, fixed To open: Turn the thumbwheel upward. 9 Side air outlet, left and right, adjustable ■: The left center air outlet is fully open. 10 Air volume control for side air outlets ■■: The left center and fixed air outlets are opened. To open: Turn thumbwheel outwards ■: 4 Air temperature control for center air outlets The side air outlet is fully opened. ■■: The side and door air outlets are opened. To lower temperature: Turn thumbwheel towards the blue marking. 11 Door air outlet, left and right 12 Display and controls Automatic mode: Turn thumbwheel to position A. The indicator lamp above the thumbwheel will illuminate. The airflow and temperature for the center air outlets are regulated automatically. Note: We recommend that the sliders for the air outlets (1, 6, 9) be clicked to the automatic position to provide practically draft free ventilation. 5 Air volume control for right center air outlet. To open: Turn the thumbwheel upward ■: The right center air outlet is fully open. ■■: The right center and fixed air outlets are opened. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 169 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 170 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Automatic climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data 170 Display and controls 8 Air volume (automatic, manual) 9 Display 1 2 Depending on the ambient light conditions, the figures on the display will be shown as dark figures on a bright background (in daylight), or as bright figures on a dark background (at night). 3 9 5 12 13 11 10 8 7 6 4 10 Temperature control, left 11 Air recirculation, see page 176 12 Air distribution, left (automatic, manual operation) 13 Activated charcoal filter P83.40-2291-26 1 Defrosting 2 Rear window defroster, see page 181 3 Residual engine heat utilization, see page 179 4 Automatic climate control on/off 5 Air distribution, right (automatic, manual operation) 6 Economy mode, see page 178 7 Temperature control, right Important! This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioning system that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected in a recovery system for recycling. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 171 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Automatic climate control Notes: The system is always at operational readiness, except when manually switched off. The current settings (Temperature, Air volume, ACOFF, Activated charcoal filter, ON/OFF) are stored for each electronic key before the electronic key is removed from the starter switch or when the vehicle is locked using the KEYLESS-GO-card (vehicles with keyless-go), see key dependent memory settings on page 113. The automatic climate control only operates with the engine running. The temperature selector should be left at the desired temperature setting. The temperature selected is reached as quickly as possible. Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a higher or lower temperature. Also keep the air intake grill in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. The desired interior temperature and air distribution can be selected separately for the left and right side of the passenger compartment. Make the temperature settings in small increments. The storage compartment between the front seats can be ventilated. See page 180 for notes on ventilating the storage space under the armrest in the center console. The automatic climate control removes considerable moisture from the air during operation in the cooling mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground through ducts in the underbody. The air conditioner switches itself off for its own protection if refrigerant is lost. No cooling will then take place. Economy mode ACOFF cannot be switched off. Have the air conditioner checked by a Mercedes-Benz Center should this happen. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the economy mode ACOFF selected, see page 178. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation If the vehicle interior has been heated by direct sunlight and it is very hot, ventilate the interior (open door or windows for a short period) before driving off. 171 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 172 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Dust filter Practical hints Car care Technical data 172 Automatic maximum cooling (MAXCOOL) Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. With the automatic climate control set to automatic, the system will automatically switch to maximum cooling output when necessary to achieve the set temperature quickly, see page 173. The display shows “AUTO MAXCOOL”. The temperature setting cannot be changed during maximum cooling operation. Note: By pressing one of the temperature buttons, the system will display briefly (approx. 5 seconds) the set temperature in the display. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 173 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Basic setting – automatic mode Air volume and distribution are controlled automatically. We recommend to set the temperature switches on the left and right to 72°F (22°C). Please make changes from this setting to suit your personal requirements. Automatic airflow regulation: Press the A on the air volume switch. The display shows “AUTO”. In the automatic mode the automatic climate control cools or heats the interior depending on the direction and strength of the sunlight, outside temperature, selected interior temperature and the actual interior temperature of the vehicle. With the automatic climate control switched off, the air volume and distribution can still be set manually. Automatic air distribution: Press on both U knobs until they click in. The h, j and k symbols will no longer be visible. The economy mode and air recirculation functions will be switched off. The automatic blower will be activated at the same time. There are three basic settings for the automatic mode: • Automatic air volume control • Automatic air outlet control, left and right • Automatic air outlet control, center, see page 169 We recommend these settings to be used all year round. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 173 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 174 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data 174 Air volume, manual Special settings (use only for short duration) P83.40-2300-21 Air distribution, manual: Press U button. The button pops out, the h, j and k symbols are visible. Turn the button to select the air distribution desired. h Air from the center, side and door air outlets. j Air from the center, side, door and windshield air outlets. k Air from the center, side, door and footwell air outlets. To return to automatic mode: Press the U button until it clicks in. The h, j and k symbols will no longer be visible. Press the air volume switch up or down. Seven blower speeds can be selected. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 175 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Windows fogged on the inside Defrosting Switch off the economy mode, if selected: Press button ACOFF. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Switch off air recirculation, if selected: Press button O. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Adjust left and right air outlets upwards. P83.40-2009-21 Set blower to the maximum blower speed. Press the P button. The display shows P. Increase temperature setting. Maximum heated and automatically controlled amount of air is directed to the defroster and windshield air outlets. Open the side air outlets and direct them onto the side windows. Switch off air recirculation, if selected: Press button O. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Pressing the P button again returns the system to the previous setting. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 175 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 176 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Windshield fogged on the outside Switch on the windshield wiper. Press on both U buttons until they click in. The h, j and k symbols will no longer be visible. Air recirculation Select air recirculation: The indicator lamp in the O button is not illuminated. Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Switch off the air recirculation: The indicator lamp in the O button is illuminated. Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Practical hints Car care Technical data 176 Switching on air recirculation and activating convenience closing of power windows and sliding/ pop-up roof: The indicator lamp in the button O is not illuminated. Press and hold button O until the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are closed. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Switching off air recirculation and activating convenience opening of power windows and sliding/ pop-up roof: The indicator lamp in the button O is illuminated. Press and hold button O until the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are in the desired position. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 177 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Activated charcoal filter The system automatically switches from air recirculation to fresh air: An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compartment. • after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above about 40°F (5°C), • after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below about 40°F (5°C), Select activated charcoal filter: The indicator lamp in the e button is not illuminated. • after 5 minutes if economy mode ACOFF is selected. The system switches automatically to air recirculation at high outside temperatures. A quantity of outside air is added after a maximum of 30 minutes. Press e button briefly. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Important! The indicator lamp in the e button is illuminated. If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch from recirculated air back to fresh air. Press e button briefly. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Switch off activated charcoal filter: The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode, if the carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxides (NOX) concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level. The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if economy mode ACOFF is selected or if the outside temperature has fallen below 40°F (5°C). Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 177 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 178 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down. Switching on the activated charcoal filter and activating convenience closing of power windows and sliding/ pop-up roof: The indicator lamp in the e button is not illuminated. Press and hold button e until the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are closed. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Switching off activated charcoal filter and activating convenience opening of power windows and sliding/ pop-up roof: The indicator lamp in the e button is illuminated. Press and hold button e until the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are in the desired position. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Practical hints Car care Technical data 178 Economy mode The function of this setting corresponds to the automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not possible to air condition in this setting. Press ACOFF button to activate. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Press ACOFF button once again to return to the previous setting. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Important! In the mode ACOFF the windows could fog up on the inside. Switch off ACOFF mode. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 179 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Residual engine heat utilization The function switches off automatically: • if the electronic key in starter switch is turned to position 2, • after approximately 30 minutes, • if the battery voltage drops. Note: The battery symbol # will appear in the automatic climate control display some time before the residual engine heat utilization is switched off if the battery voltage drops. With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for a short while, dependent of the temperature setting of the automatic climate control. Air volume and distribution are controlled automatically. To select: Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it altogether. Press button T. The display shows “REST”. This function selection will not activate if the battery level is insufficient. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 179 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 180 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Switching the automatic climate control on and off Practical hints Car care Technical data 180 Front center console storage compartment ventilation The front center console compartment has its own air outlet. To open: Slide the lever up. To close: Slide the lever down. The air volume is dependent on the setting of: • air distribution control, To switch off: • air volume control, Press button M. The display shows “0”. • air outlets in the dashboard. The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off. While driving, use this setting only temporarily, otherwise the windshield could fog up. To switch on: The air temperature is about the same as that of the dashboard air outlets. It cannot be regulated separately. Notes: • press one of the U buttons so that it pops out and then click it back in, The compartment can get very warm due to its confined space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air outlet while heating the passenger compartment. • press one of the temperature selector buttons or the air volume switch. Do not allow articles to obstruct the air outlet in the storage compartment. • press button M or P, Index J_OM_215.book Seite 181 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. To select: The defroster is automatically turned off after approximately 6–17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature and vehicle speed. Press the F button in the control panel of the automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Press the F button in the control panel of the automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. If several power consumers are turned on simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged, it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside the switch starts blinking. Notes: As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the defroster automatically turns itself back on. To cancel: Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed before activating the defroster. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 181 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 182 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data 182 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets 1 Center air outlet, left 2 Center air outlet, right 3 Air volume control for center air outlets To open: Turn the wheel to the left. 1 2 3 P83.00-2014-26 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 183 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Power windows 3 3 3 3 Control panel on rear center console. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. The control panel is located on the driver’s door. Switches for: Opening and closing the door side windows: To open press k, to close press j switch to resistance point. 1 left, front Opening rear side windows: Press k switch to resistance point. 2 right, front 3 left, rear Closing the rear side windows: Press j. 4 right, rear Release switch when window is in desired position. 5 Switch for rear door window override Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 183 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 184 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 184 Express opening and closing of windows Notes: Press k or j on the switch (door side windows) past resistance point and release – window opens or closes completely. When opening a door window, the rear side window opens slightly. The rear side window will close again when the closing procedure of the door window is completed. Press k on the switch (rear side windows) past resistance point and release – window opens completely. The rear side windows cannot be closed by the express feature. To interrupt procedure, briefly press j or k. If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop during the last few inches before closure and open slightly. When pressing and holding the switch j to close the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked during the last few inches before closure, it will stop but not open slightly. The power windows can also be opened and closed using the summer opening/convenience feature, see page 44, or pressing button O or e in the control panel of the automatic climate control, see page 176 and 177. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 185 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Warning! Blocking of rear side window operation When closing the windows, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. If no operation of the rear side windows by switch (for instance by children) is desired, slide override switch (5) to the right; the N symbol becomes visible, see page 183. In case of obstruction, the automatic reversal will not operate if a door window is being closed by pressing the switch to its resistance point and holding it there, or when using the electronic key. Operation of the rear side windows with the switches located in the driver’s door is still possible. The closing procedure of door windows can be immediately reversed by either pressing the switch or pressing button Œ on the electronic key and holding it, or (vehicle with KEYLESS-GO) when carrying the KEYLESS-GO-card, pull and hold a door handle. Synchronizing power windows If the power supply was interrupted, (battery disconnected or low), the windows cannot be opened or closed by the express feature. To resynchronize the express feature, press j side of power window switch until the window is completely closed and hold down for approximately 1 second. Repeat procedure for each window. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation The automatic full opening and closing procedure of the windows should now be restored. 185 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 186 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 186 Sliding/pop-up roof 1 Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof: Move the switch to resistance point in the required direction. 3 Release the switch when the roof has reached the required position. 2 4 Warning! When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. P77.00-2024-26 1 to slide roof open 2 to slide roof closed 3 to raise roof at rear 4 to lower roof at rear When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 187 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Express opening and closing of sliding/pop-up roof Warning! To select a sunroof opening position, press the switch to resistance point and release it when the sunroof has reached the required position. When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The sliding/pop-up roof now opens to the position set if the switch is pressed past resistance point in the “open” direction. If the automatic closing operation of the sliding/ pop-up roof is blocked while attempting to lower the roof, the roof cannot be re-opened automatically. In this case, the roof must be opened manually. If you wish to change the opening position of the sunroof, move the switch to resistance point in the direction you require. When closing the sliding/pop-up roof with the convenience feature and the closing procedure is blocked, the sliding/pop-up roof will not open automatically. Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof: Move the switch in any direction. The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately reversed by either moving the switch in any direction, or pressing button Œ on the electronic key and holding it; or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) when carrying the KEYLESS-GOcard, pull and hold a door handle. Note: Opening the sliding/pop-up roof automatically almost fully (less approximately 1 inch [3 cm]), the sunroof must have been opened first by pressing the switch to resistance point and releasing it when the sunroof has reached an almost fully open position. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch and take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. 187 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 188 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 188 Notes: The sliding/pop-up roof can also be opened and closed using the summer opening/convenience feature, see page 44, or pressing button O or e in the control panel of the automatic climate control, see page 176 and 177. To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the sliding/pop-up roof. P77.00-2048-26 With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract. The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur, see page 375. Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof The sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized if the power supply has been interrupted (battery disconnected or low), the sliding/pop-up roof has been closed manually or the sliding/pop-up roof does not open smoothly or malfunctions. • Press the switch in the “raise” (3) direction, wait until the sliding/pop-up roof is fully raised at rear and hold the switch for approximately 1 second. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 189 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 3 Right front reading lamp Interior lighting 2 1 Press the button to switch the right reading lamp (8) on or off. The right reading lamp in the rear view mirror will be switched on or off. 3 4 5 4 To switch off automatic function: Press the rocker switch. 6 The interior lighting remains switched off, even when centrally unlocking or opening a door or the electronic key is removed from the starter switch. 5 To select automatic function: Press the rocker switch to the center position. 8 7 Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when unlocking the vehicle, opening a door or removing the electronic key from starter switch. P68.00-2151-26 1 Left front reading lamp Interior lamps are switched off (soft fade) delayed, when locking the vehicle, closing the doors or inserting the electronic key in starter switch. However, there will be no delay when the electronic key is in starter switch position 2. Press the button to switch the left reading lamp (7) on or off. The left reading lamp in the interior rear view mirror will be switched on or off. 2 Rear interior lights Press the button to switch the rear passenger compartment lights on/off. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 189 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 190 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 190 Note: Entrance lamps, exit lamps The time delay for the interior light to switch off after the electronic key is removed from the starter switch can be adjusted in the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “INTERIOR LAMP DELAYED SHUT-OFF”. See page 144. With exterior lamps on or electronic key in starter switch position 1, the lamps in the door trays illuminate. To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged with doors open, all interior lamps switch off after approximately 5 minutes, when the electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0. 6 Interior lamps, front: Press rocker switch in to switch front interior and reading lamps on. The front interior lighting stays on while the rocker switch is pressed in. Switching off the front interior lighting: Press rocker switch to position (4) or (5). The lights will remain on for approximately 5 minutes if the electronic key is in starter switch position 0 and exterior lamps are switched off. Footwell lighting With parking lamps on, the driver and front passenger footwell is illuminated. Center console lighting Turn the electronic key in the starter switch to position 1. The center console is illuminated from the inside rear view mirror. Courtesy lighting Door entry lamps The interior of your vehicle is equipped with various different lighting installations to help you to orient yourself better in the dark. The appropriate entry lamp switches on if a door is opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is switched to automatic function. The entry lamp switches off automatically when the door is closed. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 191 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Rear window sunshade (optional) Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame. Warning! When operating the rear window sunshade, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure. The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately halted by briefly pressing the upper or lower half of the switch. Briefly press upper or lower half of the switch again to raise or lower the rear window sunshade completely. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. The switch is located in the center console. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Press the switch briefly: 1 to raise 2 to lower Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 191 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 192 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Technical data Car care 192 Sun visors Vanity mirrors 1 4 2 3 2 1 P68.60-2009-26 Swing sun visors (2) down to protect against sun glare. If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from the inner mounting (1) and pivot to the side, and slide it to the desired position. P68.00-2150-26 1 Illuminated vanity mirror With the visor engaged in its inner mounting (2), the lamp (4) can be switched on by opening the cover (3). Slide the mirror to the left or right for a normal or magnified image. Fold the cover (3) down to close the vanity mirror. Warning! Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 193 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Interior Storage compartments and armrests Warning! Warning! To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf below the rear window. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 193 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 194 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 194 Glove box 1 Unlocked position 2 Locked position 3 Press to open The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. See page 29 for instructions on how to remove the mechanical key from the electronic key (e.g. for valet parking service). 4 The glove box lid is equipped with a container (4) for coins and small accessories. To open, press the marking on the cover. The glove box lamp switches on with the lid open and automatically switches off after 10 minutes if the lid remains open. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 195 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Storage compartment in front of armrest A cup holder is located in the storage compartment in front of armrest, see page 199. To open: Touch the top of the cover lightly. To close: Lightly push the cover up until it engages in lock. 5 Storage compartment in front of armrest Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 195 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 196 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Storage compartment below the front armrest Practical hints Car care Technical data 196 Storage tray in the armrest To open: Press button (6) and raise the armrest. To close: Lower the armrest until it engages in lock. A coin holder is also located in the storage compartment below the armrest. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 197 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Storage space below the armrest Storage compartment under the front seats To open: Press button (7) and raise the armrest. To close: Lower the armrest until it engages in lock. Notes: The storage compartment can be heated or cooled, see page 180. The compartment can get very warm due to its confined space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air outlet while heating the passenger compartment. Do not obstruct the air outlet in the storage compartment. 8 Storage compartment under the front seats The storage space below the armrest is illuminated with the exterior lamps switched on. Maximum permissible weight of contents: 3.3 lbs. (1.5 kg) To open: Press buttons (9) together and fold the lid down. To close: Close lid until both buttons (9) of lock engage. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 197 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 198 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Storage compartments in the rear passenger compartment Practical hints Technical data Car care 198 Coat hooks 1 P68.70-2002-26 Opening the storage space: Slide the cover (10) back to open, forward to close. Coat hooks (1) are located on the headliner above the rear windows. To open: Briefly press indentation on coat hook – the coat hook folds down. To close: Push coat hook into headliner. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 199 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Cup holder Press button (2) to open the second cup holder. The cup holder opens automatically. 1 Cup holder in front seat armrest Open the storage compartment in front of the armrest, see page 195. Warning! To open: Briefly press button (1). The cup holder opens automatically. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height where the contents could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot liquids. 199 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 200 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Technical data Car care 200 4 To close: Fold second cup holder in direction of arrow (3) until it engages. Press button (4) to unlock cup holder and fold into the storage compartment until it engages. Close the storage compartment. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 201 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 To open: Push front of sliding compartment – the cup holder slides out. To close: Push the sliding compartment back until it engages. Warning! Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height where the contents could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot liquids. 5 P91.27-2014-26 5 Cup holder in rear seat armrest Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 201 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 202 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 202 Ashtrays Center console To open: Briefly touch the mark on the cover, the ashtray opens automatically. To remove ashtray insert from center console: 1 Warning! Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. With the gear selector lever in position “N”, turn off the engine and set the parking brake. Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of unintended contact with the gear selector lever. Prior to removing the ashtray insert, move the gear selector lever to position “N”. P68.20-2467-26 Press sliding knob (1) toward the right to eject the insert. To replace insert: Install insert into ashtray frame and push down to engage into place. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 203 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Rear seats To open: Briefly touch the top of the cover, the ashtray opens automatically. To remove the insert: Push down on catch (2) and pull out the ashtray insert. To install the insert: Position the insert and close the cover. 2 Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 203 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 204 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 204 Lighter Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Push in lighter (1); it will pop out automatically when hot. Warning! Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only. 1 P68.20-2468-26 1 Center console lighter When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Note: The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 100 W. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 205 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Parcel net in trunk There are hooks (1) on the left and right inside the trunk from which the parcel net is suspended. The parcel net and hooks are only designed to take light loads approximately 30 lbs (13,6 kg) in normal driving conditions. They are unable to secure a load in the event of an accident. 1 P68.00-2598-26 Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 205 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 206 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 206 Cargo tie-down hooks Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc.. Warning! Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants. P68.00-2416-26 Inside the trunk are six cargo tie-down hooks. Secure cargo by applying even load on the hooks using a cargo net. Note: With large objects stored in the parcel net do not slide the seat fully forward, it could damage them. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 207 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Telephone, general Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury. Warning! A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/ her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road and traffic conditions permit. See separate instruction manual for instructions on how to operate the telephone. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 207 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 208 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Garage door opener Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 208 Garage door opener The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled objects. Warning! When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming or operating the remote control make sure there is no possibility of anyone being harmed by the moving door. Note: 3 1 Signal transmitter keys 2 Indicator lamp 3 Portable remote control transmitter Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 209 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the handheld transmitter button and the desired integrated remote control button. Do not release the buttons until completing step 4. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates successful programming of the new frequency signal). To program the remaining two buttons, follow steps 1 through 4. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void to the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control: Note: If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully program the integrated remote control device to learn the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door opener could be equipped with the “rolling code feature”. 1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the inside rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view. Garage door opener Instruments and controls Operation 209 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 210 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Garage door opener Rolling code programming: To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.) 1. Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, reference to garage door opener operator’s manual. 2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit (which activated the “training light”). Note: Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate step 3. Practical hints Car care Technical data 210 3. Firmly press and release the programmed integrated remote control transmit button. Press and release same button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training.) 4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed button on the integrated remote control transmitter. Canadian programming: During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the integrated remote control transmitter button (note steps 2 through 4 in the “Programming” portion) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 211 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Erasing the remote control memory: Operation of remote control: 1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. 1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. 2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate the remote controlled device. The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. 2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the control lamp blinks rapidly, will erase the codes of all three channels. Garage door opener Instruments and controls Operation 211 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 212 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Infrared reflecting windshield 1 1 2 4 3 1 Mounting location for electronic toll collection devices (infrared transparent) 2 Infrared transparent area (pass-through for electronic signals) 4 19.0 in (48 cm) 5 1.75 in (4.5 cm) Technical data Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass which reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the interior through the windows. 5 3 31.5 in (80 cm) Car care 212 Infrared reflecting windshield 3 Practical hints The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in-vehicle electronic devices (e.g. electronic toll collection devices). To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, two infrared transparent areas (1 and 2) are placed in the windshield. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 213 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Driving Control and operation of radio transmitters ..................... 214 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ................................. 215 Maintenance ................................... 215 Tele Aid ........................................... 216 Catalytic converter ........................226 Emission control ............................227 Starter switch .................................228 Starter switch – KEYLESS-GO ......230 Starting and turning off the engine ..................................233 Automatic transmission ...............235 Parking brake .................................244 Contents - Driving Instruments and controls Operation Driving instructions ...................... 245 Drive sensibly – save fuel ........ 245 Drinking and driving ................ 245 Pedals .......................................... 245 Power assistance ........................ 246 Brakes .......................................... 246 Driving off ................................... 247 Parking ........................................ 248 Tires ............................................. 249 Snow chains ............................... 251 Winter driving instructions ..... 252 Deep water .................................. 254 Passenger compartment ........... 254 Traveling abroad ........................ 255 Cruise control .................................256 Distronic (DTR) ..............................259 Brake assist system (BAS) ............275 Antilock brake system (ABS) ........................................... 276 Electronic stability program (ESP) ...........................................278 Active body control (ABC) ............282 Level control system ......................283 Parking assist (Parktronic) ................................286 What you should know at the gas station .......................291 Check regularly and before a long trip ......................294 213 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 214 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Control and operation of radio transmitters Practical hints Car care Technical data 214 Control and operation of radio transmitters COMAND, radio and telephone Telephones and two-way radio Warning! Warning! Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road and traffic conditions permit. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 215 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) Maintenance The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate vehicle and engine speeds. We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called for by the FSS. Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Service Booklet at the designated times/ mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds. Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear. We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1” only at moderate speeds (for hill driving). For information on the Flexible service system (FSS), see page 150. After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually increased to the permissible maximum. The first 1 000 miles Instruments and controls Operation 215 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 216 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 216 Tele Aid Important! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If the system is not activated the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays on after turning electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: operating position, see page 230) and the message “TELE AID – NOT ACTIVATED” will be shown in the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds. If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel, for raising press button æ and for lowering press button ç. To activate, press the “SOS” button, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required. Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call, you will receive a user ID and password via first call mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock, Info Services* profile and more. * Optional System self-check Initially, after turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on). The message “TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP” appears for approx. 10 seconds in the multifunction display. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 217 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The message “EMERGENCY CALL – CONNECTING CALL” appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated. Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, in the “Roadside Assistance” button and in the “Information” button do not remain illuminated constantly in red and the message “TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP” is not displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE” appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle. Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically: • following an accident in which the Emergency Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy, • if the antitheft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, see pages 62 and 64. An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror labeled “SOS”, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See below for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually. Tele Aid Instruments and controls 217 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 218 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 218 The Tele Aid system is available if: • it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services and cellular air time • the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the response center. Note: Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the response center. Warning! If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 219 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Initiating an emergency call manually 1 2 P82.95-2186-26 P82.95-2187-26 Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open. Press the SOS button (2) briefly. The indicator lamp in the SOS button (2) will flash until the emergency call is concluded. Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center. Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is concluded. Tele Aid Instruments and controls 219 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 220 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 220 Warning! If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Roadside Assistance button • Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button •. Pressing and holding the button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE” appears in the multifunction display. The nature of the need for assistance can then be described. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as labor and/or towing charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information. These programs are only available in the USA: • Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable, • Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 221 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Notes: Information button ¡ The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (together with the “SOS” button and the Information button ¡). Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to the Customer Assistance Center. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message “INFO – CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “INFO – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). See system self-check on page 216 when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display. A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE” appears in the multifunction display. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you. Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel. For more details concerning Tele Aid, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password, sent to you separately, to learn more (USA only). Tele Aid Instruments and controls 221 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 222 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 222 Notes: Important! The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (together with the “SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance button •). If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible. See system self-check on page 216 when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “info – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display. Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel. Upgrade Signals Tele Aid system processes calls using the following priority. • Automatic emergency – First priority • Manual emergency – Second priority • Roadside assistance – Third priority • Information – Fourth priority Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is not available, the operator may need to retransmit. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 223 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Notes: During this time you will hear a chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND system operation will resume. The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing ì button on the multifunction steering wheel. Important! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. Tele Aid Instruments and controls When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. 223 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 224 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 224 Remote door unlock Notes: In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and no other key is available, contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement. The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available. Then return to your vehicle and press trunk lock for minimum of 20 seconds until the “SOS” button is flashing. The message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call. The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature. The “SOS” button will flash and the message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants. If the trunk button was pressed for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pressing the trunk button again. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 225 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Stolen vehicle tracking services Once information is available, the message “NEW INFO RECEIVED – READ LATER WHEN STOPPED?” will appear. Select “Yes”. With the vehicle stopped in a safe location press SVC, then select “View Info Service of mm.dd.yyyy hh.mm”. Messages will be retained for 30 minutes once the ignition is switched off. In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident to the police who will issue a numbered incident report. Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center. The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to Law Enforcement. Important! Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means. Info Services (optional, except Canada) Info Services categories include news, sports, stocks, weather and calendar reminders. Choices can be selected via www.mbusa.com or by calling 1-800-FORMERcedes. Warning! If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button does not illuminate during or remains illuminated after the system self-check or if the message “TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP” appears in the multifunction display, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. To request Info Services, press the SVC button on the COMAND system, then select “SEND NEW REQUEST FOR INFO SERVICE”. “NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST TRANSMITTED” will appear in the COMAND display and call status messages will appear in the multifunction display. Tele Aid Instruments and controls 225 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 226 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Catalytic converter Practical hints Car care Technical data 226 Catalytic converter Warning! Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet. As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Caution! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle. Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat, which could start a fire. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 227 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Emission control Warning! Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified MercedesBenz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service Booklet. Emission control Instruments and controls Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open. 227 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 228 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Starter switch Starter switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 228 1 Most electrical consumers can be operated. For detailed information see respective subjects. 2 Driving position. Gear selector lever is unlocked. To move the selector lever out of position “P” firmly depress the service brake pedal. 3 Starting position. See page 233 for instructions on starting and turning off the engine. See page 43 for instructions on the simultaneous use of the electronic key and the KEYLESS-GO-function. Warning! 0 The electronic key can be withdrawn in this position only. The electronic key can be removed only with the selector lever in position “P”. After removing the electronic key or with the electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1 the selector lever is locked in position “P”. When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 229 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! Notes: If the electronic key is left in the starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the lock. In this case, remove electronic key from starter switch and reinsert. A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened with the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 0. If the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be sufficiently charged. See battery on page 352 or jump starting on page 355. Caution! To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave the electronic key in starter switch position 0. With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the alternator (output) is limited. It is therefore recommended that you turn off unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stopand-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of the battery. Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system may be minimized by turning off the following power consumers, for example: Heated seats, rear window defroster. In addition, the automatic climate air volume control should be set to the lowest position. Starter switch Instruments and controls 229 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 230 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Starter switch — KEYLESS-GO Practical hints Car care Technical data 230 Start-/Stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) Warning! When leaving the vehicle always take the electronic key and the KEYLESS-GO-card with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. 1 Pressing the start-/stop button (1) on the gear selector lever without depressing the brake pedal will sequentially activate the starter switch positions 1 (on) and 2 (operation) and 0 (off). P82.50-2058-26 Symbols on start-/stop button for Canada only: See page 233 for instructions on starting and turning off the engine. See page 43 for instructions on the simultaneous use of the electronic key and the KEYLESS-GO-function. The engine can be started with the starter switch in any position (on, operation or off), as long as the gear selector lever is in position “P” or “N” and the brake pedal depressed. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 231 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! “On” position (starter switch position 1, see page 228). Most electrical consumers can be operated. For detailed information see respective subjects. For the KEYLESS-GO-system to function properly, the operator should observe the following: • If the KEYLESS-GO-card is positioned farther away from the vehicle (e.g. inside clothing or a briefcase), the vehicle cannot be locked (see page 39) or started with the start-/stop button (see page 234). Operation/driving position (starter switch position 2, see page 228). All electrical consumers can be operated. Gear selector is unlocked. • If the KEYLESS-GO-card is removed from the vehicle while the engine is running and a door opened, or by placing the card in front of the center armrest (see page 195), the message “CHIP-CARD – NOT RECOGNIZED!” will appear intermittent in the multifunction display, see page 37. “Off” position (electronic key removable from starter switch). Most electrical consumers cannot be operated. The selector lever is locked in position “P”. Notes: For improved recognition of the KEYLESS-GO-card the doors should be closed when pressing the start-/stop button. The gear selector lever can only be moved with the vehicle battery charged and connected, and the starter switch in the Operation position. With the gear selector lever in position “P”, the brake pedal must also be depressed. Starter switch — KEYLESS-GO Instruments and controls Operation 231 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 232 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Starter switch — KEYLESS-GO • Do not forget, the engine can be started by anyone if a KEYLESS-GO-card is left inside the vehicle. • To be able to operate the vehicle in the case of a malfunction in the KEYLESS-GO-system (e.g. strong radio frequency disturbance), we recommend that you carry the electronic key plus mechanical key with you and keep them in a safe place so that they are always handy. Never leave the electronic key in the vehicle. • To avoid radio transmission interference, never store the KEYLESS-GO-card together with other electronic items (e.g. cellular telephones, other KEYLESS-GOcards) or metallic objects (e.g. coins, metal foil). Practical hints Car care Technical data 232 Notes: With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the alternator (output) is limited. It is therefore recommended that you turn off unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stopand-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of the battery. Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system may be minimized by turning off the following power consumers, for example: Heated seats, rear window defroster. In addition, the automatic climate air volume control should be set to the lowest position. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 233 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Starting and turning off the engine After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Before starting Important! Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector lever is in position “P” or “N”. Due to the installed starter non-repeat feature, the electronic key must be turned completely to the left before attempting to start the engine again. Important! In areas where temperatures frequently drop below -4°F (-20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater be installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will advise you on this subject, see page 253. Turning off with the electronic key Put the selector lever in position “P” and turn the electronic key in the starter switch to position 0 to stop the engine. Starting with the electronic key The electronic key can only be removed with the selector lever in position “P”. Do not depress accelerator. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 2. Briefly turn electronic key in starter switch clockwise to the stop and release. The starter will engage until the engine is running. If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops, turn electronic key completely to the left and repeat starting the engine. Starting and turning off the engine Instruments and controls Operation 233 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 234 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Starting and turning off the engine Practical hints Car care Technical data 234 Starting with KEYLESS-GO Turning off with KEYLESS-GO Note: Stop the vehicle and put the selector lever in position “P”. For improved recognition of the chip card the doors should be closed when pressing the start-/stop button. Depress brake pedal during the starting procedure. Do not depress accelerator. Briefly press start-/stop button on gear selector lever. The starter will engage until the engine is running. If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops, press start-/stop button on gear selector lever and repeat starting the engine. After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Press start-/stop button on the selector lever until the engine stops. With the driver’s door closed the starter switch is set to the “On” position (starter switch position 1). With the driver’s door opened the starter switch is set to the “Off” position (starter switch position 0, same as electronic key removed from starter switch). Note: The engine can only be turned off with selector lever in position “P”. If attempting to turn off the engine while the selector lever is in any other position than “P” a signal sounds and the message “SELECTOR LEVER TO P” appears in the multifunction display as a reminder to move the selector to position “P”. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 235 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon • Selector lever position, see page 238 • Program mode selector, see page 242 • Accelerator position • Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation and the road characteristics. Important! When parking the vehicle or before working on the vehicle with the engine running, firmly depress the parking brake pedal and shift the selector lever into “P”. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation 235 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 236 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Practical hints Car care Technical data 236 Driving Important! The selector lever is automatically locked while in position “P”. To move the selector lever out of position “P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release. After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”, wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before accelerating, especially when the engine is cold. Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the service brake is applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the selector lever is in drive or reverse position. Accelerator position Warning! It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up on the accelerator — the transmission shifts up again. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 237 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Stopping Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to come on. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication. For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service brake. For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N” or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake. Warning! When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids unnecessary transmission heat build up. Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Maneuvering Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position “P”, see page 244 for parking brake. To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never abruptly step on the accelerator. When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel against curb. Warning! To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow), alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying slight partial throttle. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position “P”, which could result in an accident or serious injury. 237 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 238 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Selector lever position Practical hints Car care Technical data 238 Park position The park position is to be used when parking the vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always use the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever in park to secure the vehicle. Note: The electronic key can only be removed from the starter switch with the selector lever in position “P”. With the electronic key removed, the selector lever is locked in position “P”. Reverse gear The current selector lever position is indicated in the gear range indicator display. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever. Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle stopped. Dependent on the program mode selector switch position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the reverse gear is different. However, it is not possible to change the program mode while in reverse. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 239 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Neutral Gear selection for special circumstances No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage “N” while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads, see page 252 for winter driving instructions). The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever in position “D”. Important! The transmission will shift from the current gear range to the next lower gear range. The gear range currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly press selector lever in the “D –” direction: Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with selector lever in “N” can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Press and hold selector lever in the “D –” direction: The selector lever position display will switch to the gear range currently selected by the automatic transmission. Shifting into another gear range that allows for quicker acceleration or to slow the vehicle down is possible. Downshifts can also be performed. The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. Note: To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in “D –” direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per minute limit would be exceeded. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation 239 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 240 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Briefly press selector lever in the “D +” direction: The transmission will shift from the current gear range to the next higher gear range. If the transmission is already in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one gear is possible. Press and hold selector lever in the “D +” direction: The transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear range “D”. Warning! On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. Important! With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”, upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperatures. During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift and increased engine noise might be perceived as a Practical hints Car care Technical data 240 malfunction. However, neither the engine nor transmission are negatively affected by this mode of operation. The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine temperatures below 95°F (35°C). To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved to a lower gear range, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear, if the engine’s revolutions per minute limit would be exceeded. In this case there will be no downshift, even when the vehicle speed reaches the engine’s rpm limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the service brakes. To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 241 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in mountainous regions or under extreme operating conditions. This gear selection will allow use of the engine’s braking power when descending steep grades. Gear ranges: Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for performance driving. Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for moderately steep hills. Since the transmission does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear selection will allow use of the engine’s braking power downhill. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation Use this position, which makes maximum use of the engine’s braking effect, while descending very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h). 241 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 242 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Program mode selector switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 242 S Standard mode Press switch on symbol “S”. Use this mode for all regular driving. The vehicle starts out in 1st gear. Accelerator Operation: Fast on = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly (not into kickdown position) while driving continuously, rather than depressing the accelerator pedal in the usual manner, will cause the automatic transmission to shift down into a lower gear. This gear shifting process is dependent on the current vehicle speed. The transmission is provided with a selector switch (1) for Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W” program modes. The program mode currently selected is indicated in the gear range indicator display. Fast off = there will be no upshift when releasing the accelerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the engine’s braking power during performance driving. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 243 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 W Emergency operation (Limp home mode) Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode Press switch on symbol “W”. The vehicle starts out in 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st gear, or with accelerator pedal in kick-down position. If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on. The “W” mode helps to improve traction and driving stability of the vehicle. The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode. In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be activated. Caution! To engage 2nd gear or reverse: Never change the program mode when the selector lever is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared. 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Move selector lever to position “P”. 3. Turn off the engine. Important! 4. Wait approx. 10 seconds. Always be certain of the program mode selected since the vehicle driving characteristics change with the selection of the program mode. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear). Dependent on the program mode selector switch position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation Have the transmission checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 243 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 244 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Parking brake Parking brake Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 244 To engage, firmly depress parking brake pedal. When the electronic key is in starter switch position 2, the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should come on brightly. To release the parking brake, pull handle on instrument panel. The brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should go out. A warning sounds and the parking brake warning message (see page 308) appears in the multifunction display, if you start to drive without having released the parking brake. Also see brake warning lamp on page 298. Warning! When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO-card (if so equipped) with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident or serious injury. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 245 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Driving instructions Drinking and driving Drive sensibly – save fuel Warning! Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions. Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgement. To save fuel you should: The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is sharply increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. • keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures. • remove unnecessary loads, • remove roof rack when not in use, Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs. • allow engine to warm up under low load use, • avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration, Pedals • have all maintenance work performed at regular intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly country. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement. 245 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 246 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Power assistance Warning! When the engine is not running, the brake and steering systems are without power assistance. Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehicle. Practical hints Car care Technical data 246 Excessive use of salt and other snow melting chemicals spread on roads during the winter months may cause a build up of moisture or residue to form on the braking components. This build up or residue could cause light corrosion of the braking components if the vehicle is parked with the brakes cold. Apply steady and even braking pressure when stopping the vehicle to warm up and dry the brake components. Brakes Important! Warning! Please pay attention to the function of the brake assist system (BAS), see page 275. After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components or salty road conditions, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads. It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident. The condition of the parking brake system is checked each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required maintenance service at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir. Have the brake system inspected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 247 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Caution! All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Warning! After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream will cool down the brakes faster. If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. Driving off Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 247 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 248 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Practical hints Car care Technical data 248 Parking Important! Warning! It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move selector lever to position “P”. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: 1. Keep right foot on service brake pedal. 2. Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 3. Move the selector lever to position “P”. 4. Slowly release service brake pedal. 5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb. 6. Turn the electronic key to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press start-/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO). 7. Take the electronic key and the KEYLESS-GOcard (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) and lock vehicle when leaving. When parking on hills, always set the parking brake. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 249 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Tires Warning! Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Warning! If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the roadway. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures). Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs. Warning! Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 249 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 250 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Aquaplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. Tire traction Practical hints Car care Technical data 250 We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance as compared with summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not snow or ice covered. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. Tire speed rating You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point. Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h). Warning! Vehicles with Sport Package: Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 188 mph (300 km/h). If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. CL 500 and CL 600: An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 251 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 CL 55 AMG: Snow chains Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 188 mph (300 km/h). Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions. Despite the tire rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions. Always select option I or II of the level control system when driving with snow chains, see page 283. Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow. Warning! Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control switch to OFF, refer to page 280. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and resulting in personal injury and possible death. Important! Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire sizes 245/45 R18 or 275/40 R18. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 251 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 252 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move selector lever to position “N”. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action. Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done without endangering other drivers on the road. Practical hints Car care Technical data 252 If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed while observing the safety rules in the previous paragraph. Warning! If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 253 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 • Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low ambient temperatures. Winter driving Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter. • Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil which is not approved for winter operation. For viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity, see page 401. • Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on all four wheels for the winter season. Observe permissible maximum speed for M+S rated radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit. • Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration. In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP can only be achieved with M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance. • Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures, see page 340. Block heater (Canada only) The engine is equipped with a block heater. The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 253 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 254 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Practical hints Car care Technical data 254 Deep water Passenger compartment Caution! Warning! Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the engine compartment or passenger compartment, being ingested by the air intake, possibly causing damage to electrical components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 255 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Traveling abroad Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving in countries with left-hand traffic requires the headlamps to be switched over accordingly, see page 368. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 255 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 256 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 256 2 Decelerate and set: Depress lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever down to decelerate. Cruise control 1 Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired speed with the accelerator. Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be released. 3 4 2 The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed manner, for example over long distances, as it automatically maintains the set speed by actively regulating the throttle setting. Any given speed above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by operating the lever. 1 Accelerate and set: Lift lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever up to accelerate. The selected speed is shown for approx. 5 seconds in the multifunction display, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by using the accelerator. After the accelerator is released, the previously set speed will be resumed automatically. If a set speed is to be increased or decreased slightly, e.g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h) increments. When the lever is released, the newly set speed remains. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 257 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 4 Resume 3 Canceling If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when driving at a speed exceeding approx. 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise control. To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to position 3. When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle speed drops below approx. 25 mph (40 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the cruise control will be canceled. The selected speed is shown for approx. 5 seconds in the multifunction display, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. If the illuminated speedometer segments begin to blink (e.g. when aquaplaning or when moving the gear selector lever to position “N” while driving), the cruise control is automatically switched off. The last memorized speed is canceled when the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 0. If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Important! Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the cruise control off. Driving systems Instruments and controls 257 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 258 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 258 Warning! Notes: Only use the cruise control if the traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the automatic transmission shifts down (max. to 3rd gear) to maintain the set cruise control speed by using the engine’s braking power. • The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. • The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion can result in wheel spin and loss of control. The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position. Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control is switched off. Use the lever to resume the previously set speed. The “CRUISE CONTROL - - -” message is displayed on the multifunction display when any attempt is made to store speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) or when an attempt is made to recall a speed when no speed has been stored – the cruise control remains switched off. See malfunction and warning messages on page 303 if the cruise control has a malfunction. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 259 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Distronic (DTR) (optional) Any given speed between 25 mph (Canada: 40 km/h) and 110 mph (Canada: 180 km/h) can be maintained with the Distronic by operating the control lever on the steering column. When activated the Distronic system increases driving convenience, for example over long distances, as it automatically maintains a speed set by the driver by actively regulating the throttle setting. It also maintains within certain limitations a preset distance to a vehicle ahead. Warning! Distronic is a convenience system, its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not, however, intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, rests always with the driver. With Distronic switched off, the multifunction display continues to show the distance to the vehicle ahead, if so selected, see page 273. The distance warning function can be activated separately, see page 270. In Distronic mode, if the distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% of vehicle braking power, so that you follow that vehicle at a preset distance, see page 271. Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Warning! Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system. Maximum range of detection is approximately 500 ft. (150 m). Driving systems Instruments and controls 259 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 260 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Note: Practical hints Car care Technical data 260 . Warning! For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Only use Distronic if the traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Distronic does not act upon adverse sight distance conditions. Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog and heavy rain, snow or sleet. The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. Distronic does not recognize accordingly and will not react to stationary objects. It is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 261 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 3 Canceling 1 To cancel Distronic, briefly push lever to position 3. The last set speed remains stored in memory. 4 Resume 3 • If the lever is briefly pulled to position 4 when driving at a speed above approx. 25 mph (Canada: 40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which was selected prior to the cancellation of Distronic. 4 • For minor increases of speeds in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) – briefly pull lever to position 4. 2 The speed stored in memory is displayed in the multifunction display, and one or two segments around the stored speed light up in the speedometer dial, see page 274. The last memorized speed is canceled when the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 0. 1 Accelerate and set: To increase the speed by 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) – briefly lift lever up. 2 Decelerate and set: To reduce the speed by 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) – briefly depress lever. Driving systems Instruments and controls 261 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 262 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Activation of Distronic Practical hints Car care Technical data 262 • Speed is set by briefly moving the control lever to position 1 or 2. The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approx. 5 seconds (see also page 273), and one or two segments around the stored speed light up on the speedometer dial (see also page 274). • Remove foot from the accelerator. • When briefly lifting the control lever to position 1, the vehicle speed will increase in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). Any given speed above approximately 25 mph (Canada: 40 km/h) can be maintained: • Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired speed with the accelerator. The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approx. 5 seconds (see also page 273), and one or two segments around the stored speed light up on the speedometer dial (see also page 274). • When briefly lowering the control lever to position 2, the vehicle speed will decrease in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approx. 5 seconds (see also page 273), and one or two segments around the stored speed light up on the speedometer dial (see also page 274). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 263 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 • For a more precise setting the speed can be increased in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) by briefly pulling the control lever in direction (4). Invalid attempts to activate The multifunction display will show “–––MPH” during invalid attempts to activate Distronic. Distronic will not activate in the following situations: Caution! • below a speed of approx. 25 mph (Canada: 40 km/h), If the driver’s foot is not fully removed from the accelerator pedal, the message “DISTRONIC OVERRIDE” is displayed while the Distronic control system is being overridden and it will not regulate the preset vehicle speed and following distance. The vehicle speed and following distance will be determined only by the accelerator pedal position. • while the electronic stability program (ESP) is switched off – ESP warning lamp v in speedometer dial is illuminated, see page 114, • by moving the distronic control lever in “RESUME” direction (4) when no speed is stored in memory, • during the initialization and self-test phase after the engine is started – this can take up to 2 minutes, Warning! Distronic brakes (up to 20% of vehicle braking power) the vehicle to restore the preset distance or to maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens. • while depressing the service brake pedal, • while the parking brake is set – check ; warning lamp (Canada: !) in instrument cluster, see page 114, Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system. • with the gear selector lever in position “P”, “R” or “N” – check gear range indicator display in instrument cluster, see page 114. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught. Driving systems Instruments and controls See page 327 for malfunction and warning messages if the Distronic is malfunctioning. 263 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 264 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 264 Deactivation of Distronic • the gear selector lever is moved to position “N”, Briefly move the distronic control lever in “OFF” direction (3) – the stored speed remains in the memory until the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 0. • the electronic stability program (ESP) is active, Distronic is also deactivated if: • the service brake pedal is depressed, • the parking brake is activated, • the vehicle decelerates to less than approximately 25 mph (Canada: 40 km/h), e.g. while maintaining the distance to the vehicle ahead. Warning! The Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of 25 mph (Canada: 40 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time, the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. • the electronic stability program (ESP) is switched off manually, Note: A signal sounds and the message “DISTRONIC OFF” appears for 5 seconds in the multifunction display everytime Distronic is deactivated (except when moving distronic control lever in “OFF” direction). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 265 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Driving with Distronic activated from the speed of the vehicle in front up to your vehicle’s selected speed. See also page 273 for notes on the multifunction displays. Warning! Distronic brakes (up to 20% of vehicle braking power) the vehicle to restore the preset distance or to maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically retracted as this happens. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught. With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the distance warning lamp l in the speedometer dial comes on and goes out with the engine running. If the distance sensor detects a slower vehicle moving in front, your vehicle speed will be reduced by deceleration and braking of up to 20% of the vehicle braking capacity, so that you follow the vehicle ahead at the preset distance, see page 271. Segments in the speedometer illuminate to indicate the speed range Driving systems Instruments and controls 265 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 266 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 266 Warning! Caution! An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp in the speedometer dial is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision. If the driver’s foot is not fully removed from the accelerator pedal, the message “DISTRONIC OVERRIDE” appears in the multifunction display. The Distronic control system will be overridden and it will not regulate the preset vehicle speed and following distance. The vehicle speed and following distance is determined only by the accelerator pedal position. Immediately brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking as that will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. The distance warning sound continues until the driver activates the brake pedal, or the preset distance is obtained. As soon as the preset distance is obtained, the distance warning lamp goes out. Distronic works on steep uphill and downhill gradients by downshifting gears and applying the brakes to maintain the speed selected by the driver. The transmission will upshift again once the gradient evens out. The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by using the accelerator. After the accelerator is released, the previously set speed will be resumed automatically. Distronic is deactivated if a vehicle in front causes your vehicle to slow down to less than approx. 25 mph (Canada: 40 km/h). A signal sounds and the message “DISTRONIC OFF” appears for 5 seconds in the multifunction display. The vehicle speed displayed can briefly vary from the speed setting of the distronic system. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 267 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Additional driving hints The driver must always be on the alert and observe all traffic and intercede with steering and braking inputs as necessary. Warning! Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead at a distance set by Distronic). This means that: Important! When starting the engine, Distronic goes through an initialization and self-test phase – this can take up to 2 minutes. • your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you change lanes, The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a by a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message “DISTRONIC – CLEAN SENSOR!” appears in the multifunction display. • while in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front of it, then your vehicle could accelerate to the previously selected speed. Warning! Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead, but does not register stationary objects in the roadway, e.g.: Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions. • a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam. For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor see page 384. • a disabled vehicle. • an oncoming vehicle. Restart the engine after cleaning the sensor. The following are some sample situations which may influence the functions of Distronic. Driving systems Instruments and controls 267 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 268 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Traveling through turns or bends in the roadway may result in Distronic detecting a moving vehicle traveling in front but not in your lane of travel, causing your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly. You must be prepared to intercede with accelerator or brake application as necessary. Practical hints Car care Technical data 268 The Distronic system’s detection zone is relatively narrow at the start and becomes broader as it senses further from the vehicle. Thus, Distronic may not recognize another vehicle coming into your path close to the front of your vehicle. You must be prepared to intercede with braking or steering as necessary. A vehicle not traveling directly in front of you could cause detection problems, the actual distance to that vehicle really being much shorter. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 269 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 P54.70-2164-26 A narrow vehicle (e.g. a motorcycle) is only recognized when entering the area scanned by Distronic. You must apply the service brakes to gain sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. A vehicle changing lanes at close range is only recognized when entering the area scanned by Distronic. You must apply the service brakes to gain sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Driving systems Instruments and controls 269 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 270 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 270 Distance warning function Important! Even if Distronic is deactivated, the distance to the vehicle ahead continues to be measured, see page 273 for multifunction display. With the Distronic switched off, only the distance warning function operates, meaning the vehicle does not slow down. The Distronic lamp in the speedometer dial illuminates to advise the driver of a situation which under normal braking conditions and dry surfaces should have been addressed by the driver. Distronic does not register oncoming vehicles. Therefore, there is no distance warning. The distance warning function can be activated separately, see page 271. It operates when driving at speeds above approx. 20 mph (Canada: 40 km/h). If the distance warning lamp in the speedometer dial lights up while driving and an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is required. When recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists, the distance warning lamp in the speedometer dial lights up and simultaneously an intermittent warning sounds. When pressing the service brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also stops, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is sufficient again without applying the service brake pedal. In this case the distance warning lamp also extinguishes. Warning! As required by the traffic situation, apply the service brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on the distance warning function as that will result in an emergency braking application which, especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, will not always be able to avoid a collision. Important! Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic, which could result in wrong or missing distance warnings. See page 267 for additional driving hints. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 271 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Distronic settings • Decrease distance – turn thumbwheel (2) towards ®. Warning! It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance. To switch the distance warning function on or off: To switch on – press upper half of switch (1). The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. If the Distronic menu is active in the multifunction display, a loudspeaker symbol appears. 1 Switch – for distance warning function To switch off – press lower half of the switch (1). The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. If the Distronic menu is active in the multifunction display, the loudspeaker symbol disappears. 2 Thumbwheel – for setting distance Distronic provides a range of following distances to the vehicle in front. The medium setting is noticeable by a detent in the center position of the thumbwheel (2). If you want to: See page 270 for distance warning function and page 273 for multifunction displays. • Increase distance – turn thumbwheel (2) towards ¯. Driving systems Instruments and controls 271 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 272 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Notes: With the distance warning function activated, you will still be advised by a continuous audible warning if a potential emergency braking circumstance has been detected, even if Distronic has been deactivated. The last selected warning function mode (on/off) will be stored in memory, even when removing the electronic key from the starter switch. Practical hints 272 Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 273 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Multifunction displays 1 Distronic is deactivated. The actual distance (5) and the should-be distance (6) to the vehicle ahead (4) are displayed. 2 Activating Distronic. The display shows the selected speed for approx. 5 seconds. 3 Distronic is activated. The message “DISTRONIC OFF” appears for approx. 5 seconds when Distronic is being deactivated. 4 Vehicle ahead. Only appears if a vehicle is detected ahead. 5 Actual distance to vehicle ahead. 6 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead (as calculated by Distronic). 7 Own vehicle. 8 Distance warning function is activated, see page 270. To call up Distronic display: Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the display (1 or 3) appears. Driving systems Instruments and controls 273 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 274 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 274 Displays in the speedometer dial When Distronic system is activated, one or two segments around the speed stored in memory light up in the speedometer dial. If a vehicle is detected ahead, those segments in the speedometer dial light up that indicate the speed range from the speed of the vehicle in front up to the Distronic stored speed. When the vehicle in front can no longer be detected, only the segments around the stored speed light up. The vehicle is accelerated to the stored speed. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 275 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Brake assist system (BAS) Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum BAS assistance. Warning! To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous full braking power during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure. BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. If the BAS warning message is displayed in the multifunction display, a malfunction has been detected in the system. The brake system functions in the usual manner, but without BAS. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS is also switched off. If the BAS warning message is displayed in the multifunction display, have the BAS checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers by having maximum power boost applied to the brakes more quickly in emergency braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s braking style. This can help reduce braking distances over what ordinary driving and braking style might do. The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS). Driving systems Instruments and controls 275 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 276 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Antilock brake system (ABS) Warning! Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm, steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. Important! The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers. The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. Practical hints Car care Technical data 276 At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation. Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle. In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this manner only can the ABS be most effective. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pedal pressure because of the increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 277 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 ABS control If the ABS malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2 and should go out with the engine running. Warning! ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake system functions in the usual manner, but without antilock assistance. For ABS malfunction indicator lamp, see page 300. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off. The ABS malfunction indicator lamp and the ESP warning lamp come on with the engine running. If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the ABS is operational. Driving systems Instruments and controls Note: To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as appropriate. 277 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 278 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Electronic stability program (ESP) Warning! ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving conditions. Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in operation. Practical hints Car care Technical data 278 Important! If the ESP warning lamp v flashes: • During take-off apply as little throttle as possible. • While driving ease up on the accelerator. • Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. • Do not switch off the ESP. Caution! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see page 357, towing the vehicle), the engine must be shut off (electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 279 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Notes: When testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. The yellow ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer dial comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESP warning message is displayed, a malfunction has been detected in the system. Only partial engine output will be available. In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains. Have the ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Synchronizing ESP If the power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or empty), the ESP warning message may be displayed with the engine running. For ESP warning message, see page 309. With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP and the BAS is also switched off. Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The ESP warning message should go out. Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels, including the spare wheel, must have the same tire size. Driving systems Instruments and controls 279 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 280 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems ESP control switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 280 To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, switch off ESP by pressing the upper half (1) of the ESP switch. The ESP warning lamp v, located in the speedometer dial, is continuously illuminated. Warning! When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. ESP control switch located on center console. 1 Press to switch ESP off ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer dial, comes on. 2 Press to switch ESP on ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer dial, goes out. With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with the switch in the OFF position. If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient traction. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds up to approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches off at 50 mph (80 km/h). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 281 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Vehicles with Distronic (DTR): With the ESP switched off, the Distronic could not be switched on. See page 259 for activation of Distronic. Notes: Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Warning! The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial, starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in circumstances described above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers. To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP: press lower half (2) of the switch (the ESP warning lamp in the speedometer dial goes out). Important! If the ESP warning lamp flashes: • during take-off, apply as little throttle as possible, • while driving, ease up on the accelerator. Driving systems Instruments and controls 281 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 282 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Active body control (ABC) Practical hints Car care Technical data 282 The maximum suspension range is selected automatically according to the selected ABC mode (1 or 2), road condition, and driving style. The selected suspension style is stored in memory, even with the electronic key removed from the starter switch. Suspension for regular driving style This is the setting for general driving. The system is set to regular driving mode when the indicator lamp (3) is not illuminated. Press lower half of switch (2) to change from suspension style for sporty driving to regular driving style. Suspension for sporty driving style The switch is located on the center console Press the switch when the engine is running: This is the setting for sporty driving. 1 Suspension for sporty driving style Press upper half of switch (1) to select suspension style for sporty driving. The indicator lamp (3) comes on. 2 Suspension for regular driving style Note: 3 Indicator lamp for sporty driving style See “ACTIVE BODY CONTROL” on page 316 for malfunction and warning messages. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 283 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Level control system The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or lowered automatically according to the selected setting and to the vehicle speed. This helps to increase vehicle handling safety and lowers fuel consumption. The selected setting is stored in memory, even with the electronic key removed from the starter switch. Warning! To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis. Note: See “ACTIVE BODY CONTROL” on page 316 for malfunction and warning messages. The switch is located on the center console. Press the switch when the engine is running: 1 Raise vehicle chassis 2 Lower vehicle chassis 3 Indicator lamp 4 Indicator lamp Driving systems Instruments and controls 283 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 284 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 284 Level control switch positions Normal level Normal level – indicator lamps (3, 4) are not illuminated. To change from raised level options I or II, press lower half of switch (2) once respectively twice. Used for normal operation of the vehicle. Raise level, option I – indicator lamp (3) is illuminated. To change from normal level, press upper half (1) of switch. To change from raised level, option II, press lower half (2) of switch. Raised level, option 2 – indicator lamps (3, 4) are illuminated. To change from normal level or raised level, option I, press upper half (1) of switch once respectively twice. Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chassis (approximate values): • between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 35 mph (60 km/h) – none • between 35 mph (60 km/h) and 85 mph (140 km/h) – lowered progressively by approx. 7/16 inch (11 mm) Index J_OM_215.book Seite 285 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Raised level, option I Raised level, option II This setting should be used when road surface conditions are rough and must be used when driving with snow chains mounted. This setting should be used when road surface conditions are very rough for increased ground clearance. Important! Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chassis (approximate values): Driving with snow chains requires increased space between tire and wheel housing. Refer to page 251 for driving with snow chains. • at standstill - raised by approx. one inch (24 mm) Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chassis (approximate values): • between 35 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h) – lowered progressively by additional approx. one half inch (14 mm) • between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 35 mph (6o km/h) lowered progressively by approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) • at standstill – raised by approx. one half inch (14 mm) • between 35 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h) – lowered progressively by approx. one half inch (14 mm) Driving systems Instruments and controls 285 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 286 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Parking system Parking assist (Parktronic) (optional) The Parktronic system assists the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. Practical hints Car care Technical data 286 Warning! Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers rests always with the driver. The front area of the vehicle is monitored when driving forward. When reversing or with the gear selector lever in position “N”, the front as well as the rear areas are monitored. Special attention must be paid to objects having smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or street curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle. With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, Parktronic engages automatically at speeds up to approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) and deactivates during higher speeds. The operational function of the Parktronic can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. See page 384 for notes on cleaning the parktronic system sensors. Parktronic can be switched off by a control switch located in the center console. It engages automatically again when starting the engine. See page 290 for parktronic switch. Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 287 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Sensors A total of 10 sensors (1) monitor the vehicle’s front and rear areas. Six sensors are located in the front bumper, four sensors in the rear bumper. For proper operation of the Parktronic always keep the sensors clean, especially at times of snow and ice. See page 384 for instructions on cleaning the sensors in the bumpers. 1 1 1 1 Sensors located in bumpers (front bumper shown) Parking system Instruments and controls 287 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 288 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Parking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 288 Warning indicators Visual and audible signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. Warning indicators for the front area are located above the left and center air outlets in the dashboard. Warning indicators for the rear area are integrated in the rear headliner. 1 2 The frames (1) are illuminated when the Parktronic is engaged. Each warning indicator has 6 yellow and 2 red segments (2). P54.65-2043-26 1 Frame 2 Segments As soon as the sensors detect an obstacle, one or more segments light up, depending on the distance. An intermittent acoustic warning will also sound as the seventh segment lights up and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 3 seconds will sound for the eighth segment. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 289 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Monitoring reach of sensors Front bumper: Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Corner approx. 24 in The first yellow segment lights up at these distances. Additional segments light up as the vehicle comes closer to the obstacle. (60 cm) Minimum distance between vehicle and obstacle at which the system stops indicating: Rear bumper: Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) Corner approx. 32 in approx. 6 in (15 cm) Front center and rear approx. 8 in (20 cm) (80 cm) Parking system Instruments and controls Front corners 289 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 290 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Parking system The obstacle may not be recognized if outside the shaded sensor field, and no longer be indicated when approaching it any closer (warning indicators go out). Practical hints Car care Technical data 290 Parktronic switch Parktronic malfunction All red segments of the warning indicators light up, and a warning sounds for 3 seconds, if Parktronic does not function properly. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up and the system switches off automatically! 3 A dirty sensor or other ultrasonic signals could be the reason. See page 384 for instructions on cleaning the sensors in the bumpers. After cleaning the sensors, turn electronic key in starter switch to position 2. If the defect continues to be displayed, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The switch is located on the center console. 1 Parktronic switched off 2 Parktronic switched on 3 Indicator lamp – comes on when Parktronic is switched off The parktronic system is switched on again when turning the electronic key in starter switch position 2. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 291 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 What you should know at the gas station Open flap by briefly pushing near rear (arrow) and folding up. Turn fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in tank has been released, then remove cap. Failure to remove slowly could result in personal injury. Fuel supply To close the fuel filler flap, fold flap down and press past the point of resistance. See page 374 for manual release of fuel filler flap. Fuel To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit. Only fill fuel tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out — do not top up or overfill. P88.00-2027-26 Warning! Warning! Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon removing the filler nozzle which could cause personal injury. Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! What you should know at the gas station Instruments and controls Operation Driving 291 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 292 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display What you should know at the gas station Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see page 296 for notes on the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp. Fuel tank capacity approx. 23.2 US gal (88.0 l). This includes approx. 2.9 US gal (11.0 l) reserve. Use premium unleaded gasoline: CL 500, CL 55 AMG: Posted Octane Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON). CL 600: Posted Octane Index 93 (Average of 98 RON/88 MON). Practical hints Car care Technical data 292 Engine oil Checking oil level, see instructions on pages 157 and 337. CL 500 and CL 55 AMG only: Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking level: 2.1 US qt (2.0 l). Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service Products sheet. Coolant For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For further information refer to page 339. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 293 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Tire pressure Bulbs For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside the fuel filler flap. See page 351 for further details. Low beam: Xenon, high beam: H7 (55 W) fog lamps: H1 (55 W), turn signal lamps, front: 1156 NA bulb, parking and standing lamps, front: H 6W side marker lamps, front: W 5 W/4 cp, turn signal lamps, rear: 1156 NA bulb, tail and parking lamp: 67/4 cp, tail, parking and rear fog lamp, driver’s side: P 21/4 W, tail, parking, standing and side marker lamp: 67/4 cp, backup lamps: 1160/32 cp, license plate lamps: C 5 W/4 cp Air conditioner R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant, refer to “Technical Data”. Spark plugs Approved spark plugs, refer to page 397. Windshield cleaning To prevent damage to the engine hood, the windshield wipers must not be folded forward in parked position. See page 386 for cleaning the windshield. What you should know at the gas station Instruments and controls Operation Driving 293 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 294 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Check regularly and before a long trip Practical hints Car care Technical data 294 Check regularly and before a long trip 1 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For refilling reservoir see page 340. 2 Coolant level, see “Coolant level” on page 339 3 Engine oil level, see “Engine oil level, checking” on page 157 and 337 4 Brake fluid, see “Brake fluid” on page 401 Opening hood, see page 334. P20.00-2057-26 Vehicle lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on page 360. Exterior lamp switch, see page 159. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 295 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ....................296 On-board diagnostic system .......................296 Check engine malfunction indicator lamp .............................296 Brake warning lamp ..................298 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp ..................299 Fuel reserve warning .................299 ABS malfunction indicator lamp .............................300 Electronic stabilityprogram (ESP) — warning lamp ...............301 Distronic (DTR) — warning lamp ..............................301 Seat belt nonusage warning lamp ..............................302 Contents - Instrument cluster display Instruments and controls Operation Driving Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center console ...... 302 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .... 302 Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display .............. 303 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) ................. 304 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) ....................... 304 BATTERY /ALTERNATOR ......... 305 ENTRY POSITION ...................... 306 BRAKE ASSIST ........................... 306 BRAKE PAD WEAR .................... 307 BRAKE FLUID ............................ 307 PARKING BRAKE ....................... 308 TRUNK OPEN ............................. 308 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. (Electronic stability program) . 309 COOLANT (coolant level) .......... 310 COOLANT (coolant temperature) .................311 LIGHTING SYSTEM .................... 312 LAMP SENSOR ........................... 314 SEAT BELT SYSTEM ................... 314 TELEPHONE – FUNCTION ....... 315 CRUISE CONTROL ..................... 315 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (ABC) ............................................ 316 TIRE PRESSURE ......................... 318 ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................320 SEAT BACKREST ........................321 KEY ...............................................322 DOOR ...........................................322 HOOD ...........................................323 TELE AID .....................................323 WASHER FLUID .........................326 DISTRONIC (DTR) ......................327 295 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 296 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General information: If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up during the bulb self-check when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2, have it checked and replaced if necessary. Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by authorized MercedesBenz Center qualified technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service Booklet. Practical hints Car care Technical data 296 Warning! Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open. On-board diagnostic system Check engine malfunction indicator lamp Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the engine is running, it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management system, emission control system, systems which impact emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you Index J_OM_215.book Seite 297 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 With some exceptions, the control module switches off the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists during three consecutive cycles. may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we recommend that you have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuously and/or the vehicle is not driving normally (e.g. malfunction of the fuel management system or running out of fuel), serious damage can occur to the emission system. Please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the passenger compartment near to the parking brake pedal, allowing the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control module monitors emission control components that either provide input signals to or receive output signals from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from interruptions or failure of any of these components are indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are simultaneously stored in the SFI control module. Notes: When running out of fuel, the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the engine possibly switches to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode. To cancel the limp-home mode, the engine may have to be started three or four times after refueling. The malfunction indicator lamp remains illuminated. Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp comes on, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Malfunction and indicator lamps Instruments and controls Operation 297 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 298 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps Brake warning lamp Except Canada Canada only When the brake warning lamp and message appear while the engine is running, this means: • there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir (engine running and parking brake released), or • the parking brake is set (engine running). Practical hints Car care Technical data 298 Warning! Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. Note: If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 299 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Fuel reserve warning Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp The operational readiness of the airbag system is verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go out after approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the components and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a malfunction by coming on again. 1 Fuel reserve indicator Warning! When the warning lamp (1) comes on after starting the engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of approximately 2.9 gal (11 liters). In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. See page 291 for notes on refueling the vehicle. See page 92 for notes on airbags, see page 91 for belt tensioners and page 102 for infant and child seat restraint. Malfunction and indicator lamps Instruments and controls Operation 299 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 300 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps ABS malfunction indicator lamp The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2 and should go out with the engine running. ABS When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains illuminated while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake system functions in the usual manner, but without antilock assistance. A malfunctioning ABS control unit can possibly affect the operation of other systems (e.g. Parktronic, Navigation, Automatic transmission). Be guided accordingly with respect to the use of those systems and have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Practical hints Car care Technical data 300 With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off. The malfunction indicator lamp and malfunction messages in the multifunction display come on with the engine running. If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the ABS is operational. Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. See page 276 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 301 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp Distronic (DTR) – warning lamp The yellow ESP warning lamp in the speedometer dial comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It should go out with engine running. With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the distance warning lamp in the speedometer dial comes on and goes out with the engine running. If the ESP warning lamp remains illuminated with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the system. Only partial engine output will be available. See Distronic (DTR) system on page 327 for possible malfunction messages. Note: See electronic stability program (ESP) on page 278 if the warning lamp lights up or flashes when the vehicle is moving. Malfunction and indicator lamps Instruments and controls Operation The distance warning lamp is without a warning function on vehicles without distronic (DTR). 301 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 302 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps Seat belt nonusage warning lamp With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the seat belt nonusage warning lamp comes on, and a warning sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. After starting the engine, the seat belt nonusage warning lamp blinks for a brief period to remind the driver and passengers to fasten seat belts. Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center console AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp The 7 indicator lamp will light up for approximately 6 seconds when you turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. It does not light up if there is a fault in the system. The 7 indicator lamp stays lit as long as a BabySmartTM child seat is properly installed on the front passenger seat. It indicates that the front passenger airbag is switched off. Practical hints Car care Technical data 302 See page 88 for BabySmartTM airbag and its deactivation system. Warning! The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats. The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated. Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat. Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the light remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Baby SmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 303 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display Note: Certain malfunction and warning messages are accompanied by an audible signal. Malfunction and warning messages in red are always accompanied by an audible signal. Malfunction and warning messages for the following systems will be displayed immediately in the multifunction display. They are divided into three categories. Temporary messages such as “TRUNK OPEN!” will not be stored in the malfunction message memory. Category C1: Messages of most immediate priority. Warning! These cannot be cleared from the instrument cluster using the J button. Messages of less immediate priority. All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where malfunction indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. These can be cleared from the instrument cluster using the J button and are then stored in the malfunction message memory, see page 138 Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. Categories C2 and C3: Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 303 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 304 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 304 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 303 * C = Category, see page 303 This message is displayed to indicate that the information being relayed by the engine control unit is no longer complete. The display for coolant temperature gauge, tachometer, or the cruise control may have failed. The displays for several systems have failed. Some systems themselves may also have failed. J_OM_215.book Seite 305 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 BATTERY /ALTERNATOR This message indicates a malfunction which must be repaired immediately. It may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Line 1 Line 2 C* BATTERY/ALTERNATOR VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. * C = Category, see page 303 Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 305 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 306 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 306 BRAKE ASSIST ENTRY POSITION Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* ENTRY POSITION DO NOT DRIVE! 1 BRAKE ASSIST VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 303 * C = Category, see page 303 Wait until the seat and steering wheel have moved to their driving positions. The display will clear when they have done so. A malfunction has been detected in the system. The brake system functions in the usual manner, but without brake assist system (BAS). See also page 66 for easy-entry/exit feature. See page 275 for notes on the brake assist system (BAS). J_OM_215.book Seite 307 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 BRAKE FLUID BRAKE PAD WEAR Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* BRAKE PAD WEAR VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 BRAKE FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 303 * C = Category, see page 303 When this message appears during braking, it indicates that the brake pads are worn down. Warning! Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. Have the brake system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 307 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 308 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Technical data Index 308 TRUNK OPEN PARKING BRAKE Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 PARKING BRAKE RELEASE PARKING BRAKE! 1 TRUNK OPEN! * C = Category, see page 303 Car care * C = Category, see page 303 Line 2 C* 2 J_OM_215.book Seite 309 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. (Electronic stability program) 1 The display or the system is malfunctioning. 2 A malfunction has been detected in the system. Only partial engine output will be available. 3 The enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and the torque reduction feature are unavailable. 4 This message may be displayed if the power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or empty). Synchronize ESP, see page 279. Line 1 Line 2 C* DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!1 2 ESP VISIT WORKSHOP!2, 3, 4 2 * C = Category, see page 303 Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 309 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 310 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 310 COOLANT (coolant level) The low engine coolant level warning should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have the cooling system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Notes: Line 1 Line 2 C* COOLANT CHECK LEVEL! 2 * C = Category, see page 303 When this message appears while driving, the coolant level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks are noticeable and the engine temperature does not increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station and have coolant added to the coolant system. Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage. Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving, see page 117. See page 339 for instructions on topping up the coolant. Warning! Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 311 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 COOLANT (coolant temperature) During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red marking. The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Warning! Line 1 Line 2 C* COOLANT STOP, ENGINE OFF!1 1 COOLANT VISIT WORKSHOP!2 2 Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. * C = Category, see page 303 Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down. 1 This may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 2 The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. Observe the coolant temperature gauge. See page 117 Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 311 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 312 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 312 LIGHTING SYSTEM Line 1 Line 2 C* TURN SIGNAL IN MIRROR, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN SIGNAL IN MIRROR, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN SIGNAL LF CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN SIGNAL RF CHECK LAMPS! 2 BRAKE LIGHT2 VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 Line 1 Line 2 C* BRAKE LAMP, L3 CHECK LAMPS! 2 LOW BEAM,L CHECK LAMPS! 2 BRAKE LAMP, R3 CHECK LAMPS! 2 LOW BEAM,R CHECK LAMPS! 2 3RD BRAKE LAMP3 CHECK LAMPS! 2 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!1 2 HIGH BEAM, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN SIGNAL LR CHECK LAMPS! 2 HIGH BEAM, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN SIGNAL RR CHECK LAMPS! 2 LICENSE PLATE LAMP, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 LICENSE PLATE LAMP, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN OFF LAMPS! 1 CHECK LAMPS! 2 * C = Category, see page 303 FRONT FOG LAMPS, L J_OM_215.book Seite 313 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Line 1 Line 2 C* FRONT FOGLAMP, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 In the case of bulb failures in certain lamps, other lamps will substitute. See page 360 for instructions on replacing bulbs. REAR FOGLAMP CHECK LAMPS! 2 * C = Category, see page 303 REVERSE LAMP, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 1 The display or the system is malfunctioning. REVERSE LAMP, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 2 The brake lamps are switching on after a delay or are permanently on – visit workshop immediately. TAIL LAMP, L CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 TAIL LAMP, R CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 STANDING LAMP, L CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 STANDING LAMP, R CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 3 The brake lamps comprise several light emitting diodes. The warning message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. 4 Other bulbs will be brought into use as replacements when certain lamps blow. 313 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 314 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 314 SEAT BELT SYSTEM LAMP SENSOR Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* LAMP SENSOR VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 SEAT BELT SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 303 The headlamps will be switched on automatically if the light sensor malfunctions. To deactivate the daylight running lamp mode, see the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP” on page 144. It will then be possible to switch the headlamps on and off using the exterior lamp switch. See page 159 for notes on the exterior lamp switch. * C = Category, see page 303 J_OM_215.book Seite 315 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 CRUISE CONTROL TELEPHONE – FUNCTION Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE! 3 CRUISE CONTROL VISIT WORKSHOP!1 2 * C = Category, see page 303 * C = Category, see page 303. The display appears if button í or ì on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone. 1 Cruise control is malfunctioning. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 315 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 316 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 316 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (ABC) 2 The capability of the system is restricted. Important! Line 1 Line 2 C* DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!1 2 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL DRIVE CAREFULLY!2 1 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL STOP, CAR TOO LOW!3 1 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL VISIT WORKSHOP!4 2 * C = Category, see page 303 1 The display or the system is malfunctioning. When the message “ACTIVE BODY CONTROL – DRIVE CAREFULLY!” appears, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). The vehicle driving characteristics are changed due to a noticeably softer suspension. In this case visit your Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Do not continue to drive if loss of hydraulic fluid or leaks are noticed. Doing so could result in subsequent damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 317 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 3 The ABC is defective. Stop the vehicle. Press upper half of level control switch, see page 283 - system selects raised level mode. The vehicle chassis is raised depending on the kind of defect. 4 The capability of the system is restricted. Important! When the message “ACTIVE BODY CONTROL – VISIT WORKSHOP!” appears, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Important! The wheels may not have sufficient clearance when the steering wheel is turned beyond a certain angle if the “ACTIVE BODY CONTROL – STOP, CAR TOO LOW!” message appears. The front fenders will be damaged if the steering wheel is turned too far. Watch and listen for scraping noises. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 317 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 318 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 318 TIRE PRESSURE Line 1 Line 2 C* TIRE PRESSURE CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!1 1 TIRE PRESSURE CHECK TIRES!2, 3 1 4 TIRE PRESSURE CHECK TIRES! 2 TIRE PRESS. CONTROL ACTIVATED PRESS DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINS.3 2 TIRE PRESS. MONITOR REACTIVATE!3, 5 3 TIRE PRESS. MONITOR CURRENTLY INACTIVE!6 2 TIRE PRESS. MONITOR VISIT WORKSHOP!7 2 TIRE PRESSURE, LF CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!1 1 TIRE PRESSURE, RF CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!1 1 TIRE PRESSURE, LR CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!1 1 TIRE PRESSURE, RR CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!1 1 TIRE PRESSURE, LF CHECK TIRES!2 1 TIRE PRESSURE, RF CHECK TIRES!2 1 TIRE PRESSURE, LR CHECK TIRES!2 1 TIRE PRESSURE, RR CHECK TIRES!2 1 * C = Category, see page 303. LR: left rear; LF: left front; RR: right rear; RF: right front; J_OM_215.book Seite 319 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 4 Tire pressure in one or more tires is low. Check and correct tire pressure according to the label affixed inside the fuel filler flap. For tire inflation pressure, see page 351. The tire inflation pressure monitor must be activated again after the tire inflation pressure has been corrected, see page 153. Warning! Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 5 When the message appears after starting the engine, the tire inflation pressure on all road wheels should be checked and corrected according to the label affixed inside the fuel filler flap. For tire inflation pressure, see page 351. The tire inflation pressure monitor must be activated again after the tire inflation pressure has been corrected, see page 153. 1 One or more tires is or has deflated rapidly. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. For reference on changing wheels, see page 343. 6 The tire inflation pressure monitor system is unable to monitor the tire pressure due to the presence of several wheel electronics in the vehicle (e.g. a deflated road wheel in the trunk), or nearby radio interference source, or excessive wheel sensor temperatures, or unrecognized wheel sensors mounted. 2 The tire pressure on one or more tires is already below minimum value. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. For reference on changing wheels, see page 343. 3 For tire inflation pressure monitor, see page 153. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 7 The tire inflation pressure monitor is defective or a wheel without proper sensor was installed. Visit your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 319 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 320 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 320 ENGINE OIL LEVEL 3 There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil level indicator on page 157. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. Check the engine oil level immediately. See Engine oil level indicator on page 157 and check the engine for visible leakage (loss of oil). It may be that there is water in the engine oil. Have the engine oil checked. 5 The measuring system is malfunctioning. Line 1 Line 2 C* ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK LEVEL!1 2 ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP, ENGINE OFF!2 1 ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL3 2 ENGINE OIL VISIT WORKSHOP!4 2 ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP!5 2 * C = Category, see page 303. 1 The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil level indicator on page 157. 2 There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage. When the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL” message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick. When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil. The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 321 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 SEAT BACKREST Warning! Line 1 Line 2 C* SEAT BEACKREST, LEFT LOCK! 1 SEAT BEACKREST, RIGHT LOCK! 1 The seat belts provide protection only with the backrest locked in place and, therefore, must be locked in place with the vehicle in motion. Do not drive the vehicle when the backrest is not locked in place. If the warning message “SEAT BACKREST, LEFT – LOCK!” or “SEAT BACKREST, RIGHT – LOCK!” is displayed in the multifunction display, then the respective backrest is not engaged in its lock. Carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is in a safe distance from the roadway. Always provide sufficient room behind the backrest and fold the backrest all the way back until it locks in place. The warning message is no longer displayed as soon as the backrest is locked in place. If both backrests are locked in place and the warning message is still displayed, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. * C = Category, see page 303. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 321 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 322 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 322 DOOR KEY P54.30-2245-21 Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 REPLACE KEY1 VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 DOOR OPEN! AUTOM. LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY! 1 * C = Category, see page 303. * C = Category, see page 303. 1 Key needs possibly to be replaced. Line 2 C* 2 J_OM_215.book Seite 323 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 TELE AID HOOD Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* HOOD OPEN! 2 TELE AID VISIT WORKSHOP!1 1 * C = Category, see page 303. 1 The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. With this message displayed, one or more functions may not be available. See page 334 for hood. See page 216 for notes on the Tele Aid. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 323 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 324 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 324 CHIP-CARD (KEYLESS-GO) 1 Check battery of KEYLESS-GO-card, see page 372. 2 The KEYLESS-GO-card cannot be recognized by the running engine (e.g. strong radio-frequency interference) or the card is not in the vehicle. Stop immediately and search for the KEYLESS-GO-card or continue to operate the vehicle with the electronic key, otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked or the engine started again after the engine stops automatically. See page 37. 3 The KEYLESS-GO-card was momentarily not recognized. If message repeats, place card in a different position or continue to operate the vehicle with the electronic key, see page 37. Line 1 Line 2 C* CHIP CARD CHECK BATTERY!1 2 CHIP CARD NOT RECOGNIZED!2 1 CHIP CARD NOT RECOGNIZED!3 2 CHIP CARD STILL IN VEHICLE!4 1 CHIP CARD DO NOT FORGET!5 1 * C = Category, see page 303. 4 A KEYLESS-GO-card left inside the vehicle has been recognized while locking the vehicle from the outside, see page 37. 5 The message appears for a maximum 60 seconds each time the driver’s door is opened, as long as no electronic key is in the starter switch. The message appears regardless of the past operation method (electronic key or KEYLESS-GO-card), see page 37. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 325 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 AIR CLEANER SELECTOR LEVER (Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO only) Place selector lever in position “P”. The message appears when attempting to turn off the engine while the selector lever is in any other position than “P”, see page 234. Line 1 Line 2 C* REPLACE AIR CLEANER VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 303. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 325 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 326 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Car care Technical data 326 WASHER FLUID When this message appears while the engine is running, the level of the reservoir has dropped to approximately 1/3 of the total volume. The reservoir should be refilled with the prescribed mixture of MB Windshield washer concentrate and water or the concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperature, at the next opportunity. The reservoir for the windshield and headlamp washer systems is located in the engine compartment. Line 1 Line 2 C* WASHER FLUID CHECK LEVEL! 3 * C = Category, see page 303. Practical hints See windshield and headlamp washer system on page 340 for instructions on topping up the washer fluid. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 327 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 DISTRONIC (DTR) 1 Due to the presence of electro-magnetic radiation, the system is presently unavailable. After a short period of time try to activate the system again. 2 Distronic is automatically switched off. Distronic sensor in hood grille needs cleaning, see page 384. 3 The display or the system is malfunctioning. 4 Distronic is non operational. Line 1 Line 2 C* DISTRONIC EXTERNAL MALFUNCTION!1 REACTIVATE! 2 DISTRONIC MALFUNCTION CLEAN SENSOR!2 SEE OWNER’S MAN. 2 DISTRONIC VISIT WORKSHOP!3 2 SPEEDTRONIC VISIT WORKSHOP!4 2 * C = Category, see page 303. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 327 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 328 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 J_OM_215.book Seite 329 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Practical hints First aid kit .....................................330 Fuses ................................................331 Shelf below rear window ..............333 Hood .................................................334 Checking engine oil level .............337 Automatic transmission fluid level ...................................338 Active body control (ABC) fluid level ........................338 Coolant level ...................................339 Adding coolant ...........................339 Windshield and headlamp washer system ...........................340 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio .........340 Contents - Practical hints Instruments and controls Operation Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment ............................. 341 Jack .................................................. 342 Wheels ............................................ 343 Tire Replacement ....................... 343 Rotating wheels ......................... 344 Spare wheel .................................... 344 Changing wheels ........................... 346 Tire inflation pressure ................. 351 Battery ............................................. 352 Jump starting ................................. 355 Towing the vehicle ........................ 357 Exterior lamps ............................... 360 Headlamp assembly .................. 361 Taillamp assemblies .................. 364 Standby bulb function .................. 367 Changing batteries in the electronic key .................369 Synchronizing remote control ............................ 371 Changing batteries in the KEYLESS-GO-card ..............372 Emergency engine shut-down ..... 374 Fuel filler flap, manual release .......................... 374 Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof ...................375 Replacing wiper blades ................. 376 Roof rack .........................................378 329 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 330 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display First aid kit Practical hints Car care Technical data 330 First aid kit 1 The first aid kit is located in the rear seat armrest (1). To open: Press handle (2) upwards and fold the lid (3) up. Remove the first aid kit. To close: Fold the lid (3) down until it engages. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 331 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Fuse boxes in the engine compartment Fuses Most of your vehicle’s electrical components are fused with safety fuses. With the exception of the brake lights, all individual lighting system components are electronically fused. Before replacing a blown safety fuse, determine the cause of the short circuit. Always observe amperage and color of fuse. The circuit for components is protected by a cycled circuit breaker interrupted if too much current is being drawn. The circuit closes automatically after a short time; the circuit is broken again if the malfunction reoccurs. 1 3 3 Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. P54.15-2064-26 1 Fuse box in engine compartment, left-hand side A fuse chart, spare fuses and a fuse extractor are located in the vehicle tool kit in the luggage bowl under the trunk floor. See page 341 for notes on the vehicle tool kit. Fuses Instruments and controls 3 Tabs 331 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 332 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Fuses Practical hints Car care Technical data 332 To close the fuse box: Ensure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned when you replace the cover. Press the cover down by hand. Slide both tabs (3) back to the ‹ symbol on the fuse box. 2 Note: 3 3 The fuse box cover must be properly positioned and both tabs pushed forward to prevent moisture entering the fuse box. P54.15-2065-26 2 Fuse box in engine compartment, right-hand side 3 Tabs To gain access to fuse box: Slide both tabs (3) on fuse box forward to the Œ symbol and remove the cover. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 333 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Auxiliary fuse box below rear seat Shelf below rear window Warning! The shelf below the rear window should not be used to carry objects. This will avoid such objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. 4 4 Auxiliary fuse box below right rear seat. To open: Remove the cover. To close: Press the cover on. Fuses Instruments and controls 333 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 334 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine compartment Hood Warning! To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan blades. If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call a fire department. Practical hints Car care Technical data 334 The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system • with the engine running, • while starting the engine, • if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 335 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Pull handle (2) to its stop out of radiator grill and open hood (do not pull up on the handle). To open: To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the driver’s side of the instrument panel. At the same time a handle will extend out of the radiator grill. Note: To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open the hood only with the wipers in the parked position. Engine compartment Instruments and controls Operation 335 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 336 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine compartment Practical hints Car care Technical data 336 To close: 3 3 Lower the hood and let it drop into lock from a height of approx. 1 ft. (30 cm), assisting with hands placed flat on edges of hood (3). To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not push down on hood to attempt to fully close it. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 337 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Checking engine oil level 2 2 1 P18.40-2067-26 P18.40-0287-26 CL 500 CL 600 1 Dipstick Model CL 500 and CL 55 AMG Model CL 600: The dipstick is omitted. Engine oil level can be checked via the engine oil level indicator, see page 157. To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level ground, with engine at normal operational temperature. Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan. 2 Oil filler cap Engine compartment Instruments and controls Operation 337 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 338 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine compartment Practical hints Car care Technical data 338 The engine oil level can be checked by either the oil dipstick or via the multifunction display in the instrument cluster, see page 157. Wipe the oil dipstick clean prior to checking the engine oil level. Fully insert dipstick in tube, and remove after three seconds to obtain accurate reading. The oil level must be between the lower mark (min) and the upper mark (max) on the oil dipstick. Unscrew the oil filler cap and add oil carefully if you need to top up the oil. CL 500 and CL 55 AMG: Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking level is approximately 2.1 US qt (2.0 l). CL 600: Follow the message appearing on the engine oil level indicator display (page 157) as to quantity to be added. Re-install oil filler cap. Do not overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be drained or siphoned. It could cause damage to engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. See malfunction and warning messages on page 303 if an engine oil level display appears on the multifunction display when the engine is running. Note: See page 157 for engine oil level indicator. Automatic transmission fluid level The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic transmission fluid. Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted. If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmission fluid level. Active body control (ABC) fluid level Regular fluid level check is not required. If you notice fluid leaks or malfunctions, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the ABC-system. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 339 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Coolant level Adding coolant If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added. Warning! • In order to avoid possibly serious burns: Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. 1 • Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. 1 Coolant expansion tank To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine stopped. • Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. Check coolant level only when coolant is cold. The coolant level should reach the black top part of the reservoir. • Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. See page 403 for antifreeze/anticorrosion mixture. Engine compartment Instruments and controls Operation 339 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 340 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine compartment Practical hints Car care Technical data 340 Windshield and headlamp washer system Warning! Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may burn. You can be seriously burned. 1 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing: MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water. 1 part “S” to 100 parts water (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water). For temperatures below freezing: 1 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). Capacity approx. 7.1 US qt (6.7 l). MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze. 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent). Index J_OM_215.book Seite 341 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment Lift trunk floor and engage handle in upper edge of trunk. Always lower trunk floor before closing trunk lid. To remove the spare wheel: Take out the vehicle tool kit tray. Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise and remove the spare wheel. 2 To store spare wheel: Place spare wheel in wheel well and secure it with luggage bowl. Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop. 4 1 3 Place vehicle tool kit tray in luggage bowl. P40.10-0523-26 1 Jack 2 Luggage bowl with vehicle tool kit, towing eye bolt, fuses, fuse extractor and fuse chart 3 Storage tray 4 Spare wheel Spare wheel Instruments and controls 341 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 342 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Jack Practical hints Car care Technical data 342 Jack Storing the jack in the trunk: Retract the jack arm to the base of the jack, push the crank handle up and turn counterclockwise to the end of the stop (storage position). Warning! P58.10-2001-26 To prepare the jack for use: Remove the jack from the spare wheel well under the trunk floor, push the crank handle up and turn clockwise until it engages (operational position). The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 343 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Wheels It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be fastened to a tightening torque of 110 ft.lb. (150 Nm) whenever wheels are mounted. Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. For rim and tire specifications, refer to “Technical Data”. Warning! See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. When replacing rims, use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident. Tire replacement Front and rear tires should be replaced in sets. Rims and tires must be of the correct size and type. For dimensions, see “Technical Data”. We recommend that you break in new tires for approx. 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 343 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 344 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care 344 Rotating wheels Spare wheel The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel. Spare wheel CL 500 and CL 600 (except Sport Package) Rotating, however, should be carried out as recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate. Technical data Important! Notes: The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full size tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and is fully functional. However, that spare wheel rim is weight optimized and has a limited service life of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) use before a standard wheel rim must replace it. Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside. In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel. The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics and safety of the vehicle. Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted. Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove burrs, if any. Warning! Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see inside of fuel filler flap and also page 351. The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 345 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Spare wheel CL 55 AMG and Sport Package For rim and tire specifications, refer to “Technical Data”. Important! Warning! 1 The spare wheel rim size is 7 /2 J x 17 H 2 with tire size 225/55 R17 97H. The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries. The spare wheel rim is weight optimized and has a limited service life of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) use before a standard wheel rim must replace it. The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a mounted spare wheel. In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel, when observing the following restrictions: • Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road wheel as quick as possible. • Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate. • Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted. If the arrow on tire side wall does not point in direction of vehicle forward movement when using the spare wheel, observe the following restriction: Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward movement. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 345 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 346 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Changing wheels Warning! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. Practical hints Car care Technical data 346 Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance from the roadway. 1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning flasher. 2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off engine. 3. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle. On an level road, place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 347 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 P40.10-2177-26 4. Remove the two-piece wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit and assemble. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts. 5. Remove the protective cover from the jack support tube opening by inserting the screwdriver (supplied in the tool kit) in the opening and prying it out. The tube openings are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 347 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 348 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care Technical data 348 P40.10-2178-26 6. Insert jack arm fully into the tube hole up to the stop. Place jack on firm ground. Position the jack so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the side (see arrow), even if the vehicle is parked on an incline. 7. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised. P40.10-2179-26 8. Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and install alignment bolt (1) supplied in the tool kit. Remove the remaining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected from dirt and sand. 9. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep hands from beneath the wheels. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 349 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 P40.10-2264-26 P40.10-2263-26 10. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. Install spare wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. 11. Lower vehicle. Remove jack and insert jack tube cover. To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. Unscrew the alignment bolt to install the last wheel bolt. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 349 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 350 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care Technical data 350 Warning! Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct mounting bolts. P40.10-2265-26 Warning! 12. Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly, following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 ft.lb. (150 Nm). 13. Ensure proper tire pressure. Notes: Before storing the jack, the jack arm must be lowered almost to the base of the jack. For proper storage of vehicle jack see page 341. The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries. The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road wheel as quick as possible. CL 55 AMG and Sport Package: The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a mounted spare wheel. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 351 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Tire inflation pressure Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will become somewhat harder. A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended tires as well as for the varying operating conditions. For notes on checking the tire pressure using the tire inflation pressure monitor, see page 153. Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the pressure listed in the table and the respective operating conditions are taken into consideration. Important! Tire pressure changes by approx. 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage – especially in the winter. An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread separation, bulging etc.. Regular tire pressure checks (including the spare tire) at intervals of no more than 14 days are therefore essential. Example: If garage temperature = approx. +68°F (+20°C) and ambient temperature = approx. +32°F (0°C) then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure +3 psi (+0.2 bar). Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for damage. 351 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 352 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels The spare tire should be checked periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary. Warning! Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.. Follow recommended inflation pressures. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Practical hints Car care Technical data 352 Battery Warning! Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 353 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! Battery replacement information: The service life of the battery is dependent on its condition of charge. The battery should always be kept sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length of time. Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month, mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for long periods of time. Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s electrical circuit. The maintenance-free battery is located in the trunk under the right-hand wheel well cover panel. For battery removal or installation, or jump starting the vehicle, first lift the trunk floor, then turn lock (1) counterclockwise and remove cover. Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and connect last. When removing and connecting the battery, always make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the electronic key is in starter switch position 0. The battery, its filler caps, the vent tube and the opposite plug must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. Battery Instruments and controls 353 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 354 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Battery Practical hints Car care Technical data 354 While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the generator and other electronic components would be damaged. Battery recycling Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment with improper disposal. Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead. Note: The selector lever will remain locked in position “P” and the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter switch, if the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged. After reconnecting the battery also set the clock (see COMAND operator’s manual) resynchronize the express feature of the power windows (see page 185), the sliding/pop-up roof (see page 188), and the electronic stability program (see page 279). Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 355 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Jump starting Important! A discharged battery can freeze at approx. +14°F (–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury. Warning! Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured. Jumper cable specifications: • Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or approx. 2 AWG Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. • Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m). If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another vehicle. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.. Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump starting with more powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Read all instructions before proceeding. The battery is located in the trunk under the right-hand wheel well cover panel. Jump starting Instruments and controls 355 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 356 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Jump starting Practical hints Car care Technical data 356 Proceed as follows: 1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that the jumper cables will reach, but never let the vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. 2. On both vehicles: • Turn off engine and all lights and accessories, except hazard warning flashers or work lights. • Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to position “P”. Important! 3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal parts. 4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged battery and the final connection to the negative (–) under hood terminal of the disabled vehicle. Important! 5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move when the engine is started. Allow the discharged battery to charge for a few minutes. Start engine of the disabled vehicle in the usual manner. 6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables by exactly reversing the above installation sequence, starting with the last connection made first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it does not touch any other metal while the other end is still attached. Notes: If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic converter. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 357 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Towing the vehicle Important! When towing the vehicle, please, note the following: Warning! With the automatic central locking activated and the electronic key in starter switch position 2 (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: in “On” position, see page 230), the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make certain that the electronic key is in starter switch position 2. If the electronic key is left in the starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove electronic key from starter switch and reinsert. To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking.This can be adjusted in the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”. See page 144. Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. Note: The selector lever will remain locked in position “P” and the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See battery on page 352 or jump starting on page 355. Towing the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 357 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 358 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Towing the vehicle Practical hints Car care Technical data 358 2 1 Cover on right side of front bumper 2 Cover right side of rear bumper To remove cover: To remove cover: Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in trunk in spare wheel). Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in trunk in spare wheel). Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover: To reinstall cover: Fit cover and snap into place. Fit cover and snap into place. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 359 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 We recommend that the vehicle be transported using flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing. Warning! With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the braking and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Important! To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Note: The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). The electronic key must be in starter switch position 2. To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning flasher in use, turn electronic key in starter switch to position 2 and activate combination switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate. To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. Caution! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports. If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the engine must be shut off (electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Use wheel lift, dolly, or flat bed equipment, with electronic key in starter switch turned to position 0. Switch off the tow-away alarm (see page 64) and the automatic central locking, see individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK” on page 144. Towing the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 359 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 360 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps Practical hints Car care Technical data 360 Exterior lamps Replacing bulbs Headlamp adjustment Warning! Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Check and readjust headlamps at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. Warning! Notes: Bulbs and bulb holders can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you: • touch or move it when hot, • drop the bulb, • scratch the bulb. Wear eye and hand protection. To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off lamp prior to replacing a bulb. When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with the specified watt rating. When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a clean cloth. If the newly installed bulb does not light up, switch the lamp off and on again. If the bulb still does not light up, have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 361 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Headlamp assembly 4 2 1 3 5 P82.10-2197-26 P82.10-2198-26 1 Headlamp cover for high beam headlamp, parking and standing lamp 2 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb 3 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp Warning! 4 Bulb holder for turn signal lamp Do not remove cover (5) for Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 5 Cover for Xenon type headlamp bulb Exterior lamps Instruments and controls 361 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 362 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps Bulbs for high beam H7 (55 W) Practical hints Car care Technical data 362 Xenon Bulb for low/high beam Open hood. Press the clip together (arrow) and remove headlamp cover (1). Pull electrical connector off. Unclip the retainer spring and take out the bulb. Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder. Clip in retainer springs and plug the connector onto the bulb. Align headlamp cover (1) and click into place. Warning! Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 363 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Turn signal lamp (1156 NA [26.9/5 W/32/4cp]) Parking and standing lamp H 6W Open hood. Open hood. Twist bulb holder (4) counterclockwise and pull out. Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. Press the clip together (arrow) and remove headlamp cover (1). Remove the bulb socket (3). Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. Reinstall bulb socket. Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. Reinstall bulb socket. Align bulb holder (4) and turn clockwise to lock. Align headlamp cover (1) and click into place. Exterior lamps Instruments and controls 363 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 364 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps Practical hints Car care Technical data 364 Taillamp assemblies Open trunk lid. Turn lock (6) counterclockwise and fold trim to the side. Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out. Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. Reinstall bulb socket. Reinstall trim and secure with lock (6). 6 P82.10-2635-26 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 365 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 7 Black socket: Backup lamp (1156 [32 cp] bulb) 7 8 10 8 Red socket Driver’s side: Taillamp/parking lamp/rear fog lamp (P 21/4W bulb) Passenger side: Taillamp/parking lamp (P 21/4W bulb) 9 9 Grey socket: Taillamp/parking lamp/standing lamp/side marker (67 [4 cp] bulb) 10 White socket: Turn signal lamp (1156 NA bulb [yellow]) Exterior lamps Instruments and controls 365 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 366 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps License plate lamp Practical hints Car care Technical data 366 Side marker lamp, front (5 W/4 cp bulb) 1 2 P82.10-2634-26 Loosen both securing screws (1), remove lamp and replace tubular lamp (C 5 W/4 cp). Carefully slide lamp towards rear (arrow 1), and remove front end first (arrow 2). Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out. Remove bulb from socket. Insert new bulb in socket. Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist clockwise. To reinstall lamp, set rear end of lamp in bumper and let front end snap into place. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 367 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Standby bulb function Stop lamp, High mounted stop lamp, Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror The rear fog lamp, dimmed, will act as a replacement lamp, if the bulb in the inner left-hand taillamp stops working. The stop lamps, the high mounted stop lamp (3rd brake lamp), and the additional turn signals on the exterior mirrors are equipped with LEDs. The inner taillamp acts as a replacement for the right or left-hand bulb of the outer taillamp, if it stops working as a parking lamp. Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if a malfunction occurs. Notes: The multifunction display will indicate that a bulb has failed. See malfunction and warning messages on page 303. Exterior lamps Instruments and controls 367 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 368 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps Low beam, switchable for left- or right-hand drive Practical hints Car care Technical data 368 Driving in countries with left-hand traffic requires the headlamps to be switched over accordingly. 1 Asymmetric low beam (right-hand traffic) 2 Symmetric low beam (left-hand traffic) Turn lever to the respective position until it locks in place. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 369 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Changing batteries in the electronic key 2 1 3 4 P80.20-2201-26 P80.35-2029-26 1 Transmit buttons Changing batteries 2 Lamp for battery check and function control Move locking tab (3) in direction of right arrow and remove mechanical key (4, left arrow). Checking batteries If one of the transmit buttons (1) is pressed, the battery check lamp (2) lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are in order. Change batteries if the battery check lamp (2) does not light up briefly. Electronic key Instruments and controls 369 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 370 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Electronic key Practical hints Technical data Car care 370 7 8 5 4 6 P80.35-2025-26 Insert mechanical key (4) in side opening (5) to open latch. Press briefly (do not use mechanical key as lever) to release battery compartment. Remove mechanical key from side opening. Carefully remove battery compartment in direction of arrow (6). P80.35-2027-26 Change batteries (7), inserting new ones under contact spring (8) with plus (+) side facing up. Return battery compartment into housing until locked in place and slide mechanical key back into electronic key. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 371 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! Synchronizing remote control Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation on battery package. The remote control may have to be resynchronized, if the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked. To synchronize insert electronic key in starter switch. The remote control should once again be operational. Replacement Battery: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent. Electronic key Instruments and controls 371 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 372 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving KEYLESS-GO-card Practical hints Car care Technical data 372 Changing batteries in the KEYLESS-GO-card 2 Checking batteries Briefly press button (1). The indicator lamp “Unlock driver’s door” (2) or “Global Unlock” (3) should come on red or green. 3 Change batteries if indicator lamps do not illuminate, see page 373. 1 P80.30-2027-26 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 373 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Important! Changing batteries Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation on battery package. Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent. Pry open cover (1) (e.g. by using a narrow blade screw driver) and remove batteries. Install new batteries as indicated by the “+” and “-” markings in the KEYLESS-GO-card. KEYLESS-GO-card Instruments and controls Operation 373 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 374 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Emergency engine shut-down Emergency engine shut-down Practical hints Car care Technical data 374 Fuel filler flap, manual release If the engine can no longer be stopped using the electronic key or the start-/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO), the engine can be turned off by withdrawing two fuses. For easy removal of fuses use the fuse extractor (supplied with vehicle tool kit) to pull out the fuses marked on the fuse chart as “ENGINE EMERGENCY OFF”. The fuse chart is also located in the vehicle tool kit, see page 341. For fuses see page 331. Remove the battery cover (see page 352) and the trim inside the trunk on the right-hand side. Pull the release knob (arrow) and open the fuel filler flap. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 375 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof 2 1 P77.00-2022-26 P77.00-2023-26 The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur. Obtain crank (2) (supplied with vehicle) and insert through hole. The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the lens of the left interior overhead light. To slide roof closed or to raise the roof at the rear: turn crank clockwise. Pry off the interior light lens (1) using a screwdriver. To slide the roof open or to lower the roof at the rear: turn crank counterclockwise. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. See page 188 for instructions on synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof after closing manually. Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof Instruments and controls Operation Driving 375 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 376 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Replacing wiper blades Replacing wiper blades Practical hints Car care Technical data 376 • Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1. • Turn combination switch to position I, see page 164. • With wiper arms in position shown above, turn electronic key in starter switch to position 0. For safety reasons, remove electronic key from starter switch before replacing a wiper blade, otherwise the motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury. Notes: Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward. To prevent damage to the hood or the wipers, the wiper arms should only be folded forward while in the position shown above. Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be scratched or broken. Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. An improperly installed wiper blade may cause windshield damage. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 377 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Installation: Install wiper blade onto the wiper arm by inserting pin (4) into take-up (3). 3 Rotate wiper blade into position parallel to wiper arm. 4 2 1 P82.30-2089-26 Removal: Fold the wiper arm (1) forward and turn the wiper blade (2) at a right-angle to wiper arm. Remove wiper blade from wiper arm. Replacing wiper blades Instruments and controls Operation 377 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 378 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Roof rack Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 378 Roof rack Use only those roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz to avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions. Only mount roof racks on the retrofitted mounting points (see arrows). Mounting a roof rack requires a one-time installation of take-up points. Note: Please observe that the roof does not interfere with the operation of the sliding/pop-up roof and that there is sufficient clearance between the roof rack and the trunk lid in the full open position. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 379 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..................................380 Power washer ..............................381 Tar stains .....................................382 Paintwork, painted body components .................................382 Engine cleaning ..........................382 Vehicle washing .........................382 Contents - Vehicle care Instruments and controls Operation Ornamental moldings ............... 383 Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses ...................... 383 Cleaning the Distronic system sensor ............................. 384 Cleaning the parktronic system sensors ........................... 384 Wiper blades .............................. 385 Light alloy wheels ..................... 386 Instrument cluster ..................... 387 Steering wheel and gear selector lever ......................387 Cup holder ...................................387 Seat belts .....................................388 Headliner and shelf below rear window .....................388 Leather upholstery .....................388 Hard plastic trim items .............388 Plastic and rubber parts ............388 379 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 380 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Cleaning and care of the vehicle Warning! Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage. Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt, tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences. Practical hints Car care Technical data 380 More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during winter operation. You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of corrosion. In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be reundercoated. Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a waxbase rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later. We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 381 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Power washer Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions. Note: The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a KEYLESS-GO-card is in close proximity, approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. Additional information can be found in the booklet titled “Vehicle Care Guide”. Caution! Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 381 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 382 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Practical hints Car care Technical data 382 Tar stains Engine cleaning Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended. Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents. Paintwork, painted body components Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”, normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and washing detergent used. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of gloss). Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors etc.). Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. Vehicle washing Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo. Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently. Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 383 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Ornamental moldings Due to the width of the vehicle, prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold back the outside mirrors to prevent them from getting damaged. For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chromeplated parts, use a chrome cleaner. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible. Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water. Note: To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a KEYLESS-GO-card is in close proximity, approx 3 ft. (approx.1m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 383 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 384 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Cleaning the Distronic system sensor Practical hints 384 Cleaning the parktronic system sensors 1 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water to clean the sensor (1). To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. Note: Restart the engine after cleaning the sensor (1). Technical data Car care 1 1 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water. When using a steam cleaner or power washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) at sensors (1). To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 385 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Wiper blades To prevent damage to the hood or the wipers, the wiper arms should only be folded forward in the position shown above. • Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1. • Turn combination switch to position I, see page 164. • Once the wiper arms are in the position shown above, turn key in starter switch to position 0. Note: For safety reasons, remove electronic key from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury. • Turn combination switch to position 0, see page 164. Clean the wiper blade rubber with a clean cloth and detergent solution. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 385 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 386 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Practical hints Car care Technical data 386 Window cleaning Light alloy wheels Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels. Note: For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove electronic key from starter switch before cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury. If possible, clean wheels once a week with MercedesBenz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water. Follow instructions on container. Note: Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could lead to corrosion. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 387 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instrument cluster Cup holder Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. Note: Steering wheel and gear selector lever For ease of cleaning, the cup holder between the front seats can be removed by pulling it up when in its closed position. Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 387 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 388 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Practical hints Car care Technical data 388 Seat belts Leather upholstery The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented. Warning! Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Headliner and shelf below rear window Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet. Hard plastic trim items Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. Plastic and rubber parts Do not use oil or wax on these parts. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 389 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Technical data Spare parts service ........................390 Warranty coverage .........................390 Identification labels ....................... 391 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............393 Technical data ................................394 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities .......399 Engine oils ......................................401 Contents - Technical data Instruments and controls Operation Engine oil additives ...................... 401 Air conditioner refrigerant ................................. 401 Brake fluid ...................................... 401 Premium unleaded gasoline ...................................... 402 Fuel requirements ........................ 402 Gasoline additives ......................... 403 Coolants .......................................... 403 Consumer information ................. 405 389 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 390 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Car care Technical data 390 Spare parts service Warranty coverage All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of original spare parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the “warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet and your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: More than 300 000 different spare parts, for Mercedes-Benz models, are available. Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should be installed. Important! The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or compromise its durability or safety. 1. New vehicle limited warranty 2. Emission system warranty 3. Emission performance warranty 4. California, Massachusetts, and Vermont emission control systems warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 391 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Identification labels 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (below right rear passenger seat) 1 Certification label (on driver’s B pillar) Technical data Instruments and controls 391 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 392 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Car care Technical data 392 3 Engine number 4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield) 5 Emission control label 6 Information label, California version Vacuum line routing for emission control system When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers. P61.20-2014-26 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 393 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 6 7 8 1 4 5 3 CL 600 CL 500, CL 55 AMG 1 Automatic belt tensioner 5 Generator (alternator) 2 Crankshaft 6 Idler pulley 3 Air conditioner compressor 7 Power steering pump 4 Coolant pump 8 Idler pulley (CL 600 only) Technical data Instruments and controls 2 393 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 394 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Car care Technical data 394 Technical data Model CL 500 (215.3751) CL 55 AMG (215.3731) CL 600 (215.3781) Engine 113 113 137 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 8 8 12 Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm) Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.60 in (92.00 mm) 3 3.43 in (87.00 mm) 3 Total piston displacement 303.5 cu.in. (4966 cm ) 332.0 cu.in. (5439 cm ) 353.6 cu.in. (5786 cm3) Compression ratio 10:1 10.5:1 10:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 302 hp/5500 rpm (225 kW/5500 rpm) 355 hp/5500 rpm (265 kW/5500 rpm) 362 hp/5500 rpm (270 kW/5500 rpm) Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 339 ft-lb/2700 rpm (460 Nm/2700 rpm) 390 ft.lb/3150 rpm (530 Nm/3150 rpm) 391 ft-lb/4100 rpm (530 Nm/4100 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm 6000 rpm Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 Poly-V-belt 2390 mm 2390 mm 2335 mm 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 395 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Rims – Tires Model CL 500, CL 600 (except Sport Package) Model Rims (light alloy) Wheel offset: 71/2 J x 17 H 2 1.81 in (46 mm) All season tires: Radial-ply tires Rims front axle AMG light alloy rims Wheel offset: 81/2 J x 18 H 2 1.73 in (44 mm) 225/55 R17 97H Rims rear axle AMG light alloy rims Wheel offset: 91/2 J x 18 H 2 1.81 in (46 mm) Radial-ply tires front axle rear axle 245/45 R18 96Y1 275/40 R18 99Y M02, 3 Winter tires: Radial-ply tires 225/55 R17 97H M+S Spare wheel CL 500, CL 600 (Sport Package) Rim (light alloy) Wheel offset: 71/2 J x 17 H 2 2.0 in (51 mm) Spare wheel All season tire: Radial-ply tire 225/55 R17 97H Rim (light alloy) Wheel offset: 71/2 J x 17 H 2 1.81 in (46 mm) All season tire: Radial-ply tire 225/55 R17 97H 1 Also permissible 245/45 ZR18 96 Y 2 Also permissible 275/40 ZR18 96 Y M03 3 Must not be used with snow chains. Technical data Instruments and controls 395 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 396 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Car care Technical data 396 Rims – Winter tires Model CL 55 AMG Rims front axle AMG light alloy rims Wheel offset: 8 /2 J x 18 H 2 1.73 in (44 mm) Rims rear axle AMG light alloy rims Wheel offset: 91/2 J x 18 H 2 1.81 in (46 mm) Radial-ply tires front axle rear axle 245/45 R18 96Y1 275/40 R18 99Y M02, 3 1 Spare wheel Rim (light alloy) Wheel offset: 71/2 J x 17 H 2 1.81 in (46 mm) All season tire: Radial-ply tire 225/55 R17 97H 1 Also permissible 245/45 ZR18 96 2 Also permissible 275/40 ZR18 96 MO 3 3 Must not be used with snow chains. Model CL 55 AMG Rim (light alloy) Wheel offset 71/2 J x 17 H 2 1.81 in (46 mm) Winter tires: Radial-ply tires 225/55 R17 97H M+S Index J_OM_215.book Seite 397 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Electrical system Model CL 500 CL 55 AMG CL 600 Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A Starter motor 12V/1.7 kW 12V/1.7 kW 12V/2.2 kW Battery 12V/100 Ah 12V/100 Ah 12V/100 Ah Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPER Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2 NGK PFR 5 R-11 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) NGK PFR 5-11 Beru 14 F 7-DPUR X 2 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) 0.041 in (1.05 mm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) Electrode gap Tightening torque Technical data Instruments and controls 397 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 398 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Car care Technical data 398 Main Dimensions Model CL 500 CL 55 AMG CL 600 Overall vehicle length 196.4 in (4989 mm) 196.4 in (4989 mm) 196.4 in (4989 mm) Overall vehicle width 73.1 in (1857 mm) 73.1 in (1857 mm) 73.1 in (1857 mm) Overall vehicle height 55.4 in (1408 mm) 55.4 in (1408 mm) 55.4 in (1408 mm) 113.6 in (2885 mm) 113.6 in (2885 mm) 113.6 in (2885 mm) Wheel base Track, front 62.1 in (1577 mm) 62.2 in (1581 mm) 62.1 in (1577 mm) Track, rear 62.1 in (1578 mm) 62.1 in (1578 mm) 62.1 in (1578 mm) Weights Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Index J_OM_215.book Seite 399 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Center. Model Engine with oil filter Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. CL 500 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) CL 55 AMG 8.0 US qt (7.5 l) CL 600 10.0 US qt (9.5 l) Recommended engine oils Automatic transmission 9.6 US qt (9.1 l) Automatic transmission fluid Rear axle 1.7 US qt (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Hydraulic system for active body control (ABC) approx. 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) MB Hydraulic fluid Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power steering fluid Front wheel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease Brake system Cooling system 0.7 US qt (0.7 l) Operation MB Brake fluid (DOT 4+) CL 500 approx. 12.1 US qt (11.5 l) MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze CL 55 AMG approx. 12.1 US qt (11.5 l) CL 600 approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Instruments and controls Capacity Driving 399 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 400 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Model Fuel tank including a reserve of Car care Technical data 400 Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 23.2 US gal (88.0 l) 2.9 US gal (11.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON) 7.1 US qt (6.7 l) R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant (Never R-12) MB Windshield washer concentrate1 Air conditioner system Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Practical hints 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see page 340. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 401 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Engine oils Air conditioner refrigerant Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil is used in the air conditioner system. Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, otherwise damage to the system will occur. Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Brake fluid During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be harmful to the engine operation. The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two years, preferably in the spring. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Instruments and controls Operation Driving It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information. 401 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 402 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Practical hints Car care Technical data 402 Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Caution! Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM standard D 439: To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions: The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2). This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. • have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible, • avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration, • do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage, • do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%. The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure etc.. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 403 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Gasoline additives Coolants A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits. The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: • corrosion protection, • freeze protection, After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as: • boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point). The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection. • warm-up hesitation, If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). • unstable idle, • knocking/pinging, • misfire, The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every 3 years. • power loss. Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel. They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be harmful to the engine operation. To provide the important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equals a freeze protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/ antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Instruments and controls Operation Driving 403 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 404 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze. If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/ antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Practical hints Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz anticorrosion/antifreeze agent. Technical data 404 Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in the hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity Model Approx. freeze protection – 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C) CL 500, CL 55 AMG 6.1 US qt (5.75 l) 6.7 US qt (6.3 l) CL 600 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l) Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminium parts. The use of aluminium components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminium parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/ antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.) Car care Index J_OM_215.book Seite 405 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Consumer information may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. This has been prepared as required of all manufactures of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Warning! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and Consumer information Instruments and controls Operation 405 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 406 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Consumer information Practical hints Car care Technical data 406 Temperature Warning! The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure. Index J_OM_215.book Seite 407 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Index Antilock brake system (ABS) .......................................276 Malfunction indicator lamp .................................... 300 Antitheft alarm system ...................................................62 Aquaplaning .................................................................. 250 Armrest, rear bench .......................................................201 Ashtrays .......................................................................... 202 Center console, front ............................................... 202 Rear seats .................................................................. 203 Audio systems .................................................................126 Cassette player ..........................................................128 CD player ....................................................................127 Radio ...........................................................................126 Automatic central locking .............................................. 51 Automatic climate control ............................................168 Activated charcoal filter ...........................................177 Adjustable air outlets, rear passenger compartment .............................182 Air distribution, manual .......................................... 174 Air recirculation ........................................................ 176 Air volume, manual .................................................. 174 Basic setting ...............................................................173 Defogging windows ...........................................175, 176 Defrosting ...................................................................175 Display and controls .................................................170 Dust filter ...................................................................172 Economy mode ..........................................................178 A ABS (Antilock brake system) ....................................... 276 Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................300 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL malfunction and warning messages ...................... 316 Active body control (ABC) ............................................282 Active body control (ABC) fluid level .........................338 AIR CLEANER malfunction and warning messages ......................325 Air conditioner refrigerant ........................................... 401 Air distribution, manual ............................................... 174 Air volume, manual ....................................................... 174 Airbag deactivation system ............................................ 88 Airbag OFF indicator lamp ...........................................302 Airbags .............................................................................. 92 Front airbags ............................................................... 92 Side impact airbags .................................................... 95 Window curtain airbags ............................................. 95 Alarm system ............................................................. 62, 64 Anticorrosion/antifreeze ...................253, 339, 399, 404 Antiglare night position ............................................... 106 Index Instruments and controls 407 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 408 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 408 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ...................... 180 MAXCOOL .................................................................. 172 Rear window defroster ............................................. 181 Residual engine heat utilization ............................ 179 Special settings ......................................................... 174 Switching on and off ................................................ 180 Windows fogged on the inside ................................ 175 Windows fogged on the outside ...............................176 Automatic maximum cooling ....................................... 172 Automatic transmission ...............................................235 Emergency operation ...............................................243 Fluid level ...................................................................338 Program mode selector switch ...............................242 Selector lever position ..............................................238 BATTERY/ALTERNATOR malfunction and warning messages ..................... 305 Block heater ................................................................... 253 BRAKE ASSIST malfunction and warning messages ..................... 306 Brake assist system (BAS) ........................................... 275 Brake fluid ........................................... 246, 298, 399, 401 BRAKE FLUID malfunction and warning messages ..................... 307 Brake pad wear .............................................................. 307 BRAKE PAD WEAR malfunction and warning messages ..................... 307 Brake warning lamp ..................................................... 298 Brake fluid low ......................................................... 298 Brakes ...................................................244, 246, 275, 279 Bulbs See Replacing bulbs ................................................. 360 B BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ..................... 88 Self-test .........................................................................89 Backrest ............................................................................. 72 BAS (Brake assist system) ............................................275 Battery .............................................................................352 Battery recycling .......................................................354 C Capacities Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .............................. 399 Card, KEYLESS-GO ..........................................................28 Cargo tie-down hooks ................................................... 206 Catalytic converter ........................................................ 226 Center console ..................................................................24 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 409 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Center console lighting ................................................. 190 Central locking switch .................................................... 49 Central locking system ................................................... 33 Automatic central locking ......................................... 51 Central locking switch ............................................... 49 Choosing global or selective mode .................... 36, 42 Electronic key ..............................................................29 KEYLESS-GO-card .......................................................30 Locking and unlocking .............................................. 35 Locking and unlocking with KEYLESS-GO-card ..................................................39 Mechanical keys .......................................................... 46 Remote control ............................................................28 Simultaneous use of electronic main key and KEYLESS-GO-card ..........................................43 Summer opening/convenience feature ................... 44 Changing batteries in the KEYLESS-GO-card ...........372 Changing wheels ...........................................................346 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp ............296 Check regularly and before a long trip ......................294 Checking engine oil level Via engine oil level indicator .................................. 157 Via oil dipstick ...........................................................337 Child restraint ............................................ 70, 82, 88, 102 Child seat See Infant and child restraint systems .................. 102 Index Instruments and controls CHIP-CARD malfunction and warning messages ..................... 324 Cleaning and care of the vehicle ................................ 380 Coat hooks .......................................................................198 COMAND, radio and telephone ................................... 214 Combination switch .......................................................164 Consumer information ................................................. 405 Control and operation of radio transmitters .............. 214 COOLANT (coolant level) malfunction and warning messages ...................... 310 COOLANT (coolant temperature) malfunction and warning messages ...................... 311 Coolant level Adding ........................................................................ 339 Checking .................................................................... 339 Coolant temperature gauge .......................................... 117 Coolants .......................................................................... 403 Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity ........................ 404 Courtesy lighting ...........................................................190 Cruise control ................................................................ 256 CRUISE CONTROL malfunction and warning messages ...................... 315 Cup holder Center console, front ................................................199 Rear bench armrest ...................................................201 409 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 410 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 410 D Dashboard .........................................................................22 Deep water Driving instructions .................................................254 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) malfunction and warning messages ......................304 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) malfunction and warning messages ......................304 Display illumination .......................................................116 Distronic (DTR) ...................................................... 135, 259 Activation of Distronic .............................................262 Additional driving hints ..........................................267 Cleaning sensor ........................................................384 Deactivation of Distronic .........................................264 Displays in the speedometer dial ........................... 274 Distance warning function ......................................270 Distronic settings ...................................................... 271 Driving with Distronic activated ............................265 Invalid attempts to activate .....................................263 Multifunction display ...............................................273 Warning lamp ............................................................301 DISTRONIC (DTR) malfunction and warning messages ......................327 DOOR malfunction and warning messages ......................322 Door control panel ...........................................................20 Door entry lamps ...........................................................190 Doors ..................................................................................47 Power closing assist ....................................................49 Drinking and driving .................................................... 245 Drive sensibly - save fuel ............................................. 245 Driving instructions ..................................................... 245 Driving off ...................................................................... 247 E Easy-entry/exit feature ...................................................66 ELEC. STABIL. PROGR. malfunction and warning messages ..................... 309 Electronic key ...................................................................29 Changing batteries .................................................. 369 Starting the engine .................................................. 233 Turning off the engine ............................................ 233 Electronic main key Synchronizing remote control ................................371 Electronic stability program (ESP) ............................. 278 Warning lamp ............................................................301 Emergency call See Tele Aid ............................................................... 216 Emergency engine shut-down ......................................374 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 411 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof ............375 Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ......................... 91 Emergency unlocking in case of accident ................... 51 Emission control ............................................................227 Emission control label ..................................................392 Engine compartment .....................................................334 Engine malfunction CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp ................................296 Engine oil additives ....................................................... 401 Engine oil consumption ................................................ 158 Engine oil level Checking ....................................................................337 Warning ......................................................................320 ENGINE OIL LEVEL malfunction and warning messages ......................320 ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT WHEN ENGINE ON (measuring) multifunction indicator ............................................ 157 Engine oil level indicator .............................................. 157 Engine oils ...................................................................... 401 Entrance lamps, exit lamps .......................................... 190 ENTRY POSITION malfunction and warning messages ......................306 ESP (Electronic stability program) ............ 251, 278, 359 Control switch ...........................................................280 Index Instruments and controls Malfunction and warning messages ..................... 309 Synchronizing .......................................................... 279 Express opening and closing of power windows .....................................................184 Exterior lamp malfunction and warning messages ...................... 312 Exterior lamp switch .....................................................159 Daytime running lamp mode .................................. 161 Headlamp cleaning system ......................................163 Exterior lamps ............................................................... 360 License plate lamps ................................................. 366 Low and high beam ...................................................361 Parking lamps ........................................................... 363 Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 360 Side marker lamp, front .......................................... 366 Standing lamps ......................................................... 363 Taillamp assemblies ................................................ 364 Turn signal lamp ...................................................... 363 Exterior mirror adjustment ..........................................107 Exterior mirror, front passenger side, parking position ........................................................108 Exterior rear view mirrors ............................................107 Electrically folding ....................................................109 Parking position ........................................................108 411 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 412 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 412 F G Fastening seat belts ......................................................... 85 First aid kit .....................................................................330 Flat tire See Changing wheels ...............................................346 Flexible service system (FSS) ...................................... 150 Footwell lighting ............................................................ 190 Front airbags ....................................................................92 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ........................... 180 Front seat adjustment ..................................................... 67 Fuel Gasoline additives ....................................................403 Premium unleaded gasoline .................292, 400, 402 Fuel cap placement warning See CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp ................................296 Fuel filler flap, manual release ................................... 374 Fuel requirements .........................................................402 Fuel reserve warning ....................................................299 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities ...............399 Fuse box .......................................................................... 331 Fuses, electrical ............................................................. 331 Garage door opener ...................................................... 208 Gasoline Additives .................................................................... 403 Fuel requirements ................................................... 402 Premium unleaded .................................................. 402 General notes on the central locking system ..............32 Global locking See Central locking system .......................................33 Glove box .........................................................................194 H Hazard warning flasher switch ...................................167 Head restraints Power head restraints, rear ....................................... 81 Head restraints, front seats Removal and installation ........................................... 71 Headlamp adjustment .................................................. 360 Headlamp cleaning system ...........................................163 Headlamp mode ..............................................................160 Headlights .......................................................................159 Heated seats ...................................................................... 76 High beams See combination switch ...........................................164 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 413 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Hood .................................................................................334 HOOD malfunction and warning messages ......................323 Instrument lamps ........................................................... 116 Instruments and controls ............................................... 18 Interior General notes .............................................................193 Interior lighting ..............................................................189 I Identification labels ....................................................... 391 Illuminated vanity mirrors ........................................... 192 Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster .................................114, 296 Individual settings ......................................................... 140 "INST. CLUSTER" (Instrument Cluster) ................. 142 "LIGHTING" ............................................................... 144 "VEHICLE" ................................................................. 147 Infant and child restraint systems .............................. 102 Installation ................................................................. 104 Information call See Tele Aid ............................................................... 216 Infrared reflecting windshield .................................... 212 Inside rear view mirror ................................................. 106 INST. CLUSTER (Instrument Cluster) See individual settings ............................................ 142 Instrument cluster ..........................................................114 Activating ....................................................................116 Instrument cluster illumination ...................................116 Index Instruments and controls J Jack .................................................................................. 342 Jump starting ................................................................. 355 K Key dependent memory settings ................................. 113 KEYLESS-GO .....................................................................37 Changing batteries in the card .............................. 372 Checking last KEYLESS-GO-card locking mode ...........................................................42 Choosing global or selective mode ...........................42 Easy-entry/exit feature ..............................................66 Starting the engine .................................................. 234 Turning off the engine ............................................ 234 KEYLESS-GO-card ..................................................... 28, 30 Convenience feature ...................................................44 413 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 414 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 414 Keys, changing batteries in the electronic key .................................................369 Keys, changing batteries in the Keyless-Go-card .............................................372 Keys, vehicle .....................................................................28 L LAMP SENSOR malfunction and warning messages ...................... 314 Lamps, exterior ..............................................................360 Headlamps ................................................159, 312, 383 License plate lamp ....................................................366 Low and high beam .................................................. 361 Parking lamps ...........................................................363 Replacing bulbs .........................................................360 Side marker lamp, front ...........................................366 Standing lamps ..........................................................363 Taillamp assemblies .................................................364 Turn signal lamp .......................................................363 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............................................393 Level control system ......................................................283 Lighter .............................................................................204 LIGHTING See individual settings ............................................ 144 LIGHTING SYSTEM malfunction and warning messages ...................... 312 Limp home mode (Automatic transmission) ....................................... 243 Locking and unlocking ............................................. 35, 39 Low beams See Exterior lamp switch .........................................159 Low engine coolant level warning ............................... 310 Lumbar support ................................................................ 74 M Maintenance ................................................................... 215 Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ........................................ 296 Malfunction and warning messages .......................... 303 ACTIVE BODY CONTROL ......................................... 316 AIR CLEANER ........................................................... 325 BATTERY/ALTERNATOR ......................................... 305 BRAKE ASSIST ......................................................... 306 BRAKE FLUID ........................................................... 307 BRAKE PAD WEAR .................................................. 307 CHIP-CARD ............................................................... 324 COOLANT (coolant level) ......................................... 310 COOLANT (coolant temperature) ........................... 311 CRUISE CONTROL .................................................... 315 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 415 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) .........304 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) ...............304 DISTRONIC (DTR) .....................................................327 DOOR ..........................................................................322 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. ...............................................309 ENGINE OIL LEVEL ..................................................320 ENTRY POSITION .....................................................306 HOOD ..........................................................................323 KEY .............................................................................322 Lamp SENSOR ........................................................... 314 LIGHTING SYSTEM ................................................... 312 PARKING BRAKE ......................................................308 SEAT BACKREST ....................................................... 321 SEAT BELT SYSTEM ................................................. 314 SELECTOR LEVER ....................................................325 TELE AID ....................................................................323 TELEPHONE - FUNCTION ....................................... 315 TIRE PRESSURE ........................................................ 318 TRUNK OPEN ............................................................308 WASHER FLUID ........................................................326 Malfunction/warning message memory .................... 138 Manual operation of sliding/pop-up roof ...................375 Mechanical keys ............................................................... 46 Memory function ............................................................111 Mirror, exterior Parking position ........................................................ 108 Index Instruments and controls Mirror, exterior, adjusting ............................................107 Mirror, exterior, parking position, front passenger side .................................................108 Mirror, exterior, rear view ............................................107 Mirror, inside, rear view ...............................................106 Multicontour backrest ..................................................... 74 Multifunction display ....................................................120 Audio systems ............................................................126 Cassette player ..........................................................128 CD Player ....................................................................127 Distronic (DTR) ..........................................................135 Engine oil level indicator .........................................124 FSS ...............................................................................124 Individual settings ....................................................140 Malfunction/warning message memory ...............138 Radio ...........................................................................126 Telephone ...................................................................129 Telephone — Incoming call ......................................133 Telephone — Redialing ............................................. 131 Telephone book .........................................................129 Tire inflation pressure monitor ..............................124 Trip and main odometer and sub menu ................124 Trip computer ............................................................136 Vehicle speed .............................................................124 Multifunction steering wheel .......................................120 415 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 416 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 416 N On-board diagnostic system .........................................296 Operator’s Manual ............................................................. 8 Outside temperature indicator .....................................117 Overhead control panel ................................................... 21 Power head restraints, rear ............................................ 81 Power seats, front Backrest ........................................................................72 Seat ventilation system ..............................................79 Power windows ...............................................................183 Blocking of rear side window operation ................185 Express opening and closing ..................................184 Opening and closing ...................................................44 Synchronizing ...........................................................185 Problems with your vehicle ............................................ 14 Product information .......................................................... 7 P R Panic button ...................................................................... 46 Parcel net in front passenger footwell .......................206 Parcel net in trunk ........................................................205 Parking ............................................................................248 Parking assist (Parktronic) ..........................................286 Parking brake ............................. 202, 244, 248, 298, 346 PARKING BRAKE malfunction and warning messages ......................308 Power assistance ............................................................246 Power closing assist Doors and trunk lid .................................................... 49 Radio See Audio systems ....................................................126 Radio - see Audio systems ............................................126 Radio transmitters ......................................................... 214 Rain sensor See intermittent wiping ...........................................165 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets ................................................182 Rear view mirror Inside, automatic antiglare ......................................106 Navigation system .......................................................... 134 Night security illumination ......................................... 162 O Index J_OM_215.book Seite 417 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 S Rear view mirrors .......................................................... 106 Exterior ....................................................................... 107 Interior ........................................................................ 106 Storing mirror positions .......................................... 106 Rear window defroster .................................................. 181 Rear window sunshade ................................................. 191 Remote control ................................................................. 28 Battery replacement .................................................369 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints .......................................... 71 Replacement keys Obtaining .....................................................................30 Replacing bulbs ..............................................................360 Replacing wiper blades ................................................. 376 Reporting Safety Defects ................................................ 15 Reserve warning lamp Fuel reserve warning ...............................................299 Residual engine heat utilization (REST) .................... 179 Roadside assistance ......................................................... 10 Roadside assistance call See Tele Aid ............................................................... 216 Roof rack .........................................................................378 Index Instruments and controls SEAT BACKREST malfunction and warning messages ......................321 SEAT BELT SYSTEM malfunction and warning messages ...................... 314 Seat belts ...........................................................................82 Fastening ......................................................................85 Operation ......................................................................86 Seat belt nonusage warning system .........................83 Unfastening ..................................................................86 Warning lamp ........................................................... 302 Seat belts and integrated restraint system ..................82 Seat heater ........................................................................ 76 Seat ventilation system ...................................................79 Seats Front seat adjustment ................................................67 Heated seat ................................................................... 76 Memory .......................................................................111 Multicontour seat ........................................................ 74 Ventilated seat .............................................................79 Selective locking See Central locking system .......................................33 SELECTOR LEVER malfunction and warning messages ..................... 325 417 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 418 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 418 Service indicator See Flexible service system (FSS) .......................... 150 Setting the audio volume .............................................. 149 Shelf below rear window ..............................................333 Side impact airbags ......................................................... 95 Side marker lamp ..........................................................366 Simultaneous use of electronic main key and KEYLESS-GO-card .......................................................43 Sliding/pop-up roof ....................................................... 186 Emergency operation ...............................................375 Opening and closing ..................................................44 Synchronizing ........................................................... 188 Snow chains .................................................................... 251 SOS-call See Tele Aid ............................................................... 216 Spare wheel ....................................................................344 Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment ................................................ 341 Special settings (Automatic climate control) .................................... 174 SRS indicator lamp ........................................................299 SRS malfunction ..............................................................92 Standby bulb function ...................................................367 Start lock-out ..................................................................... 31 Electronic main key .................................................... 31 KEYLESS-GO-card ....................................................... 31 Starter switch .........................................................228, 230 Starting and turning off the engine ........................... 233 Starting the engine Electronic key ........................................................... 233 KEYLESS-GO ............................................................. 234 Steering lock See Starter switch ............................................228, 230 Steering wheel Easy-entry/exit feature ..............................................66 Storage compartment Trunk floor .................................................................341 Storage compartment in the rear passenger compartment ..................................198 Storage compartments and armrests ..........................193 Center console ...........................................................195 Glove box ....................................................................194 Storing mirror positions ...............................................107 Sun visors ........................................................................192 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ...........................90 Synchronizing remote control .....................................371 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 419 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 T Tire inflation pressure monitor ...................................153 Inquiry of present tire inflation pressure .............153 TIRE PRESSURE malfunction and warning messages ...................... 318 Tire traction ................................................................... 250 Tires ................................................................................ 405 Driving instructions ................................................ 249 Rims and tires .......................................................... 395 Rotating wheels ........................................................ 344 Tire inflation pressure .............................................351 Tire replacement ...................................................... 343 Winter driving instructions .................................... 253 Tool kit See Vehicle tools ........................................................341 Tow-away alarm ................................................................64 Towing the vehicle ........................................................ 357 Transmission ................................................................. 235 Traveling abroad ........................................................... 255 Trip computer .................................................................136 Trip odometer ................................................................. 119 Trunk .................................................................................52 Opening ........................................................................36 Power closing assist ....................................................49 Release switch .............................................................56 Release/close system ..................................................57 Trunk lid closing feature ...........................................54 Tachometer ......................................................................119 Technical data ................................................................394 Electrical system .......................................................397 Main dimensions ......................................................398 Rims and tires ...........................................................395 Weights .......................................................................398 Tele Aid ........................................................................... 216 Emergency calls ........................................................ 217 Information ................................................................ 221 Initiating an emergency call manually ................. 219 Roadside Assistance .................................................220 TELE AID malfunction and warning messages ......................323 Telephone ........................................................................ 129 General notes .............................................................207 Incoming call ............................................................. 133 Redialing .................................................................... 131 Telephone book ......................................................... 129 TELEPHONE - FUNCTION malfunction and warning messages ...................... 315 Telephones and two-way radios ................................... 214 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ................................ 215 Tire inflation pressure .................................................. 351 Index Instruments and controls 419 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 420 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 420 Trunk lamp ....................................................................... 55 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built prior to September 2001) ................60 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built September 2001 and later) ............. 61 Trunk lid release switch .................................................56 TRUNK OPEN malfunction and warning messages ......................308 Turn signal failure ......................................................... 164 Turn signals .................................................................... 164 Turning off the engine Electronic key ............................................................233 KEYLESS-GO ..............................................................234 U Unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO-card .......................................................39 Unlocking the vehicle with remote control .............................................................35 V Vanity mirrors ................................................................192 VEHICLE See individual settings .............................................147 Vehicle jack .................................................................... 342 Vehicle keys ......................................................................28 Vehicle tools ....................................................................341 Ventilated seats ................................................................79 Index J_OM_215.book Seite 421 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 W Warning lamps See Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ....................................296 Warranty coverage .........................................................390 WASHER FLUID - malfunction and warning messages ....................................................326 Washing the vehicle ......................................................382 What you should know at the gas station .................. 291 Wheels .............................................................................343 Where to find it ................................................................ 13 Window curtain airbags .................................................96 Windows See Power windows .................................................. 183 Windshield washer system ..........................................340 Winter driving ................................................................253 Winter driving instructions .........................................252 Wiper blades, replacing ................................................ 376 Wiper operation See Combination switch .......................................... 164 Index Instruments and controls 421 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index J_OM_215.book Seite 422 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 J_OM_215.book Seite 423 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 J_OM_215.book Seite 424 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 J_OM_215.book Seite 425 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz site www.mbusa.com. Warning! To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Title illustration no. P00.00-2835-26 Press time 05/18/01 GSP/SIP Printed in Germany J_OM_215.book Seite 426 Mittwoch, 30. Mai 2001 2:01 14 Order No. 6515 2120 13 Part No. 215 584 73 81 USA Edition A 2002 Please observe the following: BOOKSPINE for Operator’s Manual 5 /8 in. (1.6 cm) 215 3.5“ (8.9 cm) Operator’s Manual CL-Class Please ensure the correct position of model code and model name